]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
* lisp/subr.el (read-quoted-char): Use read-key.
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @include emacsver.texi
12
13 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
14
15 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
16 @c Set the following @-commands appropriately.
17
18 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
19 @c @smallbook
20 @c @clear largebook
21
22 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
23 @c @c smallbook
24 @c @set largebook
25
26 @c European A4 size paper:
27 @c @c smallbook
28 @c @afourpaper
29 @c @set largebook
30
31 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
32 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
33
34 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
35 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
36 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
37
38 @set smallbook
39 @ifset smallbook
40 @smallbook
41 @clear largebook
42 @end ifset
43
44 @c ================ Included Figures ================
45
46 @c If you clear this, the figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams
47 @c rather than PostScript/PDF.
48 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
49 @set print-postscript-figures
50 @c clear print-postscript-figures
51
52 @comment %**end of header
53
54 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
55 @c save on paper cost.
56 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
57 @tex
58 @ifset smallbook
59 @fonttextsize 10
60
61 @end ifset
62 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
63 @end tex
64
65 @c These refer to the printed book sold by the FSF.
66 @set edition-number 3.10
67 @set update-date 28 October 2009
68
69 @c For next or subsequent edition:
70 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
71 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
72 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
73
74 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
75 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
76 @ifset largebook
77 @tex
78 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
79 @end tex
80 @end ifset
81
82 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
83 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
84
85 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
86 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
87
88 @tex
89 \if \xrefprintnodename
90 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
91 \else
92 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
93 \fi
94 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
95 @end tex
96
97 @c ----------------------------------------------------
98
99 @dircategory GNU Emacs Lisp
100 @direntry
101 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
102 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
103 @end direntry
104
105 @copying
106 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
107 people who are not programmers.
108 @sp 1
109 @iftex
110 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
111 @end iftex
112 @ifnottex
113 Distributed with Emacs version @value{EMACSVER}.
114 @end ifnottex
115 @ifset WWW_GNU_ORG
116 @html
117 <p>The homepage for GNU Emacs is at
118 <a href="http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/">http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/</a>.
119 <br>To view this manual in other formats, click
120 <a href="/software/emacs/emacs-lisp-intro/emacs-lisp-intro.html">here</a>.
121 @end html
122 @end ifset
123 @sp 1
124 Copyright @copyright{} 1990--1995, 1997, 2001--2013 Free Software
125 Foundation, Inc.
126 @sp 1
127
128 @iftex
129 Published by the:@*
130
131 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/}@*
132 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
133 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
134 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
135 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
136 @end iftex
137
138 @ifnottex
139 Printed copies available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by:
140
141 @example
142 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/
143 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
144 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
145 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
146 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
147 @end example
148 @end ifnottex
149
150 @sp 1
151 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
152
153 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
154 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
155 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
156 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
157 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
158 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
159 Documentation License''.
160
161 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
162 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
163 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
164 @end copying
165
166 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
167 @tex
168 {\begingroup%
169 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
170 \endgroup}%
171 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
172 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
173 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
174 @end tex
175
176 @titlepage
177 @sp 6
178 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
179 @sp 2
180 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
181 @sp 2
182 @center Revised Third Edition
183 @sp 4
184 @center by Robert J. Chassell
185
186 @page
187 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
188 @insertcopying
189 @end titlepage
190
191 @iftex
192 @headings off
193 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
194 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
195 @end iftex
196
197 @ifnothtml
198 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
199 @ifset largebook
200 @tex
201 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
202 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
203 @end tex
204 @end ifset
205 @end ifnothtml
206
207 @shortcontents
208 @contents
209
210 @ifnottex
211 @node Top
212 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
213
214 @insertcopying
215
216 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
217 every node in every chapter.
218 @end ifnottex
219
220 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
221
222 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
223 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
224 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
225
226 @c iftex
227 @c global@pageno = -11
228 @c end iftex
229
230 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
231 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
232
233 @menu
234 * Preface:: What to look for.
235 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
236 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
237 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
238 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
239 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
240 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
241 a region.
242 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
243 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
244 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
245 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
246 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
247 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
248 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
249 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
250 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
251 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
252 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
253 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
254 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
255 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
256 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
257 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
258 * GNU Free Documentation License::
259 * Index::
260 * About the Author::
261
262 @detailmenu
263 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
264
265 Preface
266
267 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
268 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
269 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
270 * Lisp History::
271 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
272 * Thank You::
273
274 List Processing
275
276 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
277 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
278 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
279 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
280 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
281 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
282 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
283 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
284 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
285 * Summary:: The major points.
286 * Error Message Exercises::
287
288 Lisp Lists
289
290 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
291 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
292 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
293 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
294
295 The Lisp Interpreter
296
297 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
298 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
299
300 Evaluation
301
302 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
303 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
304
305 Variables
306
307 * fill-column Example::
308 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
309 without a function.
310 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
311
312 Arguments
313
314 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
315 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
316 of a variable or list.
317 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
318 variable number of arguments.
319 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
320 to a function.
321 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
322
323 Setting the Value of a Variable
324
325 * Using set:: Setting values.
326 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
327 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
328
329 Practicing Evaluation
330
331 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
332 causes evaluation.
333 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
334 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
335 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
336 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
337 the buffer.
338 * Evaluation Exercise::
339
340 How To Write Function Definitions
341
342 * Primitive Functions::
343 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
344 * Install:: Install a function definition.
345 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
346 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
347 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
348 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
349 * if:: What if?
350 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
351 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
352 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
353 * Review::
354 * defun Exercises::
355
356 Install a Function Definition
357
358 * Effect of installation::
359 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
360
361 Make a Function Interactive
362
363 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
364 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
365
366 @code{let}
367
368 * Prevent confusion::
369 * Parts of let Expression::
370 * Sample let Expression::
371 * Uninitialized let Variables::
372
373 The @code{if} Special Form
374
375 * if in more detail::
376 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
377
378 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
379
380 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
381
382 @code{save-excursion}
383
384 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
385 * Template for save-excursion::
386
387 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
388
389 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
390 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
391 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
392 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
393 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
394 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
395 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
396 * Buffer Exercises::
397
398 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
399
400 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
401 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
402
403 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
404
405 * append-to-buffer overview::
406 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
407 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
408 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
409
410 A Few More Complex Functions
411
412 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
413 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
414 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
415 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
416 * Second Buffer Related Review::
417 * optional Exercise::
418
419 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
420
421 * insert-buffer code::
422 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
423 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
424 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
425 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
426 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
427 * New insert-buffer::
428
429 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
430
431 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
432 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
433
434 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
435
436 * Optional Arguments::
437 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
438 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
439
440 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
441
442 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
443 * Large buffer case::
444 * Small buffer case::
445
446 Narrowing and Widening
447
448 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
449 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
450 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
451 * narrow Exercise::
452
453 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
454
455 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
456 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
457 * cons:: Constructing a list.
458 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
459 * nth::
460 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
461 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
462 * cons Exercise::
463
464 @code{cons}
465
466 * Build a list::
467 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
468
469 Cutting and Storing Text
470
471 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
472 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
473 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
474 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
475 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
476 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
477 * cons & search-fwd Review::
478 * search Exercises::
479
480 @code{zap-to-char}
481
482 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
483 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
484 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
485 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
486 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
487 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
488
489 @code{kill-region}
490
491 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
492 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
493 * Lisp macro::
494
495 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
496
497 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
498 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
499
500 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
501
502 * last-command & this-command::
503 * kill-append function::
504 * kill-new function::
505
506 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
507
508 * See variable current value::
509 * defvar and asterisk::
510
511 How Lists are Implemented
512
513 * Lists diagrammed::
514 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
515 * List Exercise::
516
517 Yanking Text Back
518
519 * Kill Ring Overview::
520 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
521 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
522
523 Loops and Recursion
524
525 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
526 * dolist dotimes::
527 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
528 * Looping exercise::
529
530 @code{while}
531
532 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
533 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
534 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
535 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
536 * Incrementing Loop Details::
537 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
538
539 Details of an Incrementing Loop
540
541 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
542 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
543 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
544
545 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
546
547 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
548 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
549 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
550
551 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
552
553 * dolist::
554 * dotimes::
555
556 Recursion
557
558 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
559 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
560 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
561 * Recursive triangle function::
562 * Recursion with cond::
563 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
564 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
565 * No deferment solution::
566
567 Recursion in Place of a Counter
568
569 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
570 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
571
572 Recursive Patterns
573
574 * Every::
575 * Accumulate::
576 * Keep::
577
578 Regular Expression Searches
579
580 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
581 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
582 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
583 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
584 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
585 * Regexp Review::
586 * re-search Exercises::
587
588 @code{forward-sentence}
589
590 * Complete forward-sentence::
591 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
592 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
593
594 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
595
596 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
597 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
598 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
599
600 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
601
602 * Why Count Words::
603 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
604 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
605 * Counting Exercise::
606
607 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
608
609 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
610 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
611
612 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
613
614 * Divide and Conquer::
615 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
616 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
617 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
618 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
619 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
620 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
621 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
622 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
623 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
624
625 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
626
627 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
628 * append:: Attach one list to another.
629
630 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
631
632 * Data for Display in Detail::
633 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
634 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
635 * Counting function definitions::
636
637 Readying a Graph
638
639 * Columns of a graph::
640 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
641 * recursive-graph-body-print::
642 * Printed Axes::
643 * Line Graph Exercise::
644
645 Your @file{.emacs} File
646
647 * Default Configuration::
648 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
649 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
650 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
651 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
652 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
653 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
654 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
655 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
656 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
657 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
658 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
659 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
660 * Miscellaneous::
661 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
662
663 Debugging
664
665 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
666 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
667 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
668 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
669 * Debugging Exercises::
670
671 Handling the Kill Ring
672
673 * What the Kill Ring Does::
674 * current-kill::
675 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
676 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
677 * ring file::
678
679 The @code{current-kill} Function
680
681 * Code for current-kill::
682 * Understanding current-kill::
683
684 @code{current-kill} in Outline
685
686 * Body of current-kill::
687 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
688 * Determining the Element::
689
690 A Graph with Labeled Axes
691
692 * Labeled Example::
693 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
694 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
695 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
696 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
697
698 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
699
700 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
701 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
702 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
703 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
704 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
705 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
706
707 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
708
709 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
710 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
711
712 Printing the Whole Graph
713
714 * The final version:: A few changes.
715 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
716 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
717 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
718 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
719 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
720 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
721
722 @end detailmenu
723 @end menu
724
725 @node Preface
726 @unnumbered Preface
727
728 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
729 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
730 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
731 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
732 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
733 extension to the editor.
734
735 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
736 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
737 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
738 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
739 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
740 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
741 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
742 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
743
744 @menu
745 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
746 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
747 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
748 * Lisp History::
749 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
750 * Thank You::
751 @end menu
752
753 @ifnottex
754 @node Why
755 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
756 @end ifnottex
757
758 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
759 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
760 you would any other programming language.
761
762 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
763 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
764 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
765 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
766 can teach yourself to go further.
767
768 @node On Reading this Text
769 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
770
771 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
772 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
773 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
774 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
775 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
776 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
777 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
778 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
779 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
780 there.
781
782 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
783 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
784 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
785 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
786 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
787 implemented.
788 Also, I
789 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
790 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
791 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
792
793 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
794 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
795 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
796 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
797 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
798 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
799 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
800 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
801 around your home town.
802
803 @ignore
804 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
805 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
806 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
807 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
808 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
809 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
810 @end ignore
811
812 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
813 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
814 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
815 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
816 advantage.
817
818 @node Who You Are
819 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
820
821 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
822 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
823 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
824 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
825
826 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
827
828 @quotation
829 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
830 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
831
832 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
833 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
834 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
835 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
836 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
837 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
838 @end quotation
839
840 This introduction is not written for this person!
841
842 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
843 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
844 different context, or to review it.
845
846 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
847 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
848 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
849 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
850 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
851 information is formally introduced.)
852
853 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
854 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
855 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
856 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
857 what is important, and concentrate on it.
858
859 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
860 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
861 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
862 as a daunting mountain.
863
864 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
865 document,
866 @iftex
867 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
868 @end iftex
869 @ifnottex
870 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
871 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
872 @end ifnottex
873 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
874 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
875 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
876 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
877 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
878 when you are writing your own programs.
879
880 @node Lisp History
881 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
882 @cindex Lisp history
883
884 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
885 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
886 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
887 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
888
889 @cindex Maclisp
890 @cindex Common Lisp
891 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
892 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
893 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
894 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
895 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
896
897 @node Note for Novices
898 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
899
900 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
901 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
902 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
903 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
904 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
905 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
906
907 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
908 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
909 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
910 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
911 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
912 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
913 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
914 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
915 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
916 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
917 @key{ALT}.)
918 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
919 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
920 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
921 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
922 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
923 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
924 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
925 press the @key{\} key.
926
927 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
928 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
929 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
930 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
931 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
932 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
933 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
934 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
935
936 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
937 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
938 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
939
940 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
941 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
942 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
943
944 @node Thank You
945 @unnumberedsec Thank You
946
947 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
948 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
949 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.
950 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
951 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
952 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
953
954 @flushright
955 Robert J. Chassell
956 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
957 @end flushright
958
959 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
960
961 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
962
963 @tex
964 \par\vfill\supereject
965 \headings off
966 \ifodd\pageno
967 \par\vfill\supereject
968 \else
969 \par\vfill\supereject
970 \page\hbox{}\page
971 \par\vfill\supereject
972 \fi
973 @end tex
974
975 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
976 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
977 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
978 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
979 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
980 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
981 @c E.g., note that the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
982 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
983 @iftex
984 @headings off
985 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
986 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
987 @global@pageno = 1
988 @end iftex
989
990 @node List Processing
991 @chapter List Processing
992
993 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
994 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
995 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
996 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
997 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
998 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
999 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1000 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1001 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1002 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1003 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1004
1005 @menu
1006 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1007 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1008 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1009 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1010 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1011 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1012 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1013 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1014 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1015 * Summary:: The major points.
1016 * Error Message Exercises::
1017 @end menu
1018
1019 @node Lisp Lists
1020 @section Lisp Lists
1021 @cindex Lisp Lists
1022
1023 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1024 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1025 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1026 to be familiar with:
1027
1028 @smallexample
1029 @group
1030 '(rose
1031 violet
1032 daisy
1033 buttercup)
1034 @end group
1035 @end smallexample
1036
1037 @noindent
1038 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1039 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1040 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1041 @cindex Flowers in a field
1042
1043 @menu
1044 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1045 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1046 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1047 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1048 @end menu
1049
1050 @ifnottex
1051 @node Numbers Lists
1052 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1053 @end ifnottex
1054
1055 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1056 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1057 separated by whitespace.
1058
1059 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1060 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1061 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1062 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1063 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1064 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1065 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1066
1067 @need 1200
1068 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1069
1070 @smallexample
1071 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1072 @end smallexample
1073
1074 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1075 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1076 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1077 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1078
1079 @node Lisp Atoms
1080 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1081 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1082
1083 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1084 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1085 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1086 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1087 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1088 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1089 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1090 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1091
1092 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1093 right next to a parenthesis.
1094
1095 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1096 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1097 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1098 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1099 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1100 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1101 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1102
1103 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1104 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1105 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1106 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1107 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1108 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1109 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1110 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1111 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1112 as a synonym for expression.)
1113
1114 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1115 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1116 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1117 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1118 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1119 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1120 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1121 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1122 unsplittable.
1123
1124 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1125 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1126 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1127 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1128
1129 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1130 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1131 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1132 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1133 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1134 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1135 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1136 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1137 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1138 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1139 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1140
1141 @need 1250
1142 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1143 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1144 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1145
1146 @smallexample
1147 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1148 @end smallexample
1149
1150 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1151 @noindent
1152 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1153 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1154 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1155 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1156 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1157 used differently.
1158
1159 @node Whitespace in Lists
1160 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1161 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1162
1163 @need 1200
1164 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1165 of the Lisp language,
1166
1167 @smallexample
1168 @group
1169 '(this list
1170 looks like this)
1171 @end group
1172 @end smallexample
1173
1174 @need 800
1175 @noindent
1176 is exactly the same as this:
1177
1178 @smallexample
1179 '(this list looks like this)
1180 @end smallexample
1181
1182 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1183 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1184 @samp{this} in that order.
1185
1186 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1187 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1188 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1189 order to tell them apart.)
1190
1191 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1192 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1193 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1194 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1195 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1196 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1197 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1198
1199 @node Typing Lists
1200 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1201 @cindex Help typing lists
1202 @cindex Formatting help
1203
1204 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1205 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1206 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1207 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1208 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1209 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1210 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1211 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1212 the enclosing list.
1213
1214 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1215 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1216 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1217 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1218 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1219 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1220
1221 @node Run a Program
1222 @section Run a Program
1223 @cindex Run a program
1224 @cindex Program, running one
1225
1226 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1227 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1228 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1229 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1230 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1231 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1232 three things that you really want!)
1233
1234 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1235 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1236 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1237 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1238 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1239 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1240 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1241 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1242 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1243 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1244
1245 @need 1250
1246 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1247 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1248 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1249
1250 @smallexample
1251 (+ 2 2)
1252 @end smallexample
1253
1254 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1255 @noindent
1256 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1257 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1258 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1259 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1260 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1261
1262 @smallexample
1263 '(this is a quoted list)
1264 @end smallexample
1265
1266 @noindent
1267 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1268
1269 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1270 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1271 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1272 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1273 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1274 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1275 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1276
1277 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1278 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1279 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1280 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1281 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1282
1283 @node Making Errors
1284 @section Generate an Error Message
1285 @cindex Generate an error message
1286 @cindex Error message generation
1287
1288 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1289 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1290 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1291 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1292 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1293 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1294 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1295 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1296
1297 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1298 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1299
1300 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1301 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1302 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1303 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1304 C-e}:
1305
1306 @smallexample
1307 (this is an unquoted list)
1308 @end smallexample
1309
1310 @ignore
1311 @noindent
1312 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1313 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1314 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1315 earlier, version 20 result.
1316
1317 @need 1250
1318 @noindent
1319 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1320 you will see the following in it:
1321 @end ignore
1322
1323 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1324 following in it:
1325
1326 @smallexample
1327 @group
1328 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1329 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1330 (this is an unquoted list)
1331 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1332 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1333 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1334 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1335 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1336 @end group
1337 @end smallexample
1338
1339 @need 1200
1340 @noindent
1341 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1342 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1343 debugger window go away, type:
1344
1345 @smallexample
1346 q
1347 @end smallexample
1348
1349 @noindent
1350 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1351 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1352 it.
1353
1354 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1355 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1356
1357 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1358 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1359 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1360 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1361 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1362 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1363
1364 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1365 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1366 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1367 backwards.
1368
1369 @need 800
1370 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1371
1372 @smallexample
1373 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1374 @end smallexample
1375
1376 @noindent
1377 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1378 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1379 @samp{void-function this}.
1380
1381 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1382
1383 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1384 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1385 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1386 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1387 computer to do something.
1388
1389 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1390 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1391 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1392
1393 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1394 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1395 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1396 contain the instructions is `void'.
1397
1398 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1399 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1400 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1401 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1402
1403 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1404 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1405 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1406 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1407 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1408 the echo area and look like this:
1409
1410 @smallexample
1411 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1412 @end smallexample
1413
1414 @noindent
1415 @ignore
1416 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1417 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1418 @end ignore
1419 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1420 move the cursor.
1421
1422 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1423 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1424 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1425 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1426 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1427 moment.)
1428
1429 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1430 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1431 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1432
1433 @node Names & Definitions
1434 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1435 @cindex Symbol names
1436
1437 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1438 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1439 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1440 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1441 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1442 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1443 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1444 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1445 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1446 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1447
1448 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1449 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1450 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1451 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1452 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1453
1454 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1455 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1456 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1457 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1458 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1459 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1460
1461 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1462 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1463 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1464 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1465 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1466
1467 @node Lisp Interpreter
1468 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1469 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1470 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1471
1472 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1473 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1474 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1475 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1476 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1477 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1478 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1479 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1480
1481 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1482 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1483 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1484 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1485 yourself or the computer.
1486
1487 @menu
1488 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1489 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1490 @end menu
1491
1492 @ifnottex
1493 @node Complications
1494 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1495 @end ifnottex
1496
1497 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1498 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1499 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1500 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1501 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1502
1503 @cindex Special form
1504 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and
1505 do not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called
1506 @dfn{special forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a
1507 function, and there are not many of them. In the next few chapters,
1508 you will be introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1509
1510 As well as special forms, there are also @dfn{macros}. A macro
1511 is a construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it
1512 translates a Lisp expression into another expression that is to be
1513 evaluated in place of the original expression. (@xref{Lisp macro}.)
1514
1515 For the purposes of this introduction, you do not need to worry too much
1516 about whether something is a special form, macro, or ordinary function.
1517 For example, @code{if} is a special form (@pxref{if}), but @code{when}
1518 is a macro (@pxref{Lisp macro}). In earlier versions of Emacs,
1519 @code{defun} was a special form, but now it is a macro (@pxref{defun}).
1520 It still behaves in the same way.
1521
1522 The final complication is this: if the function that the
1523 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1524 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1525 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1526 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1527 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1528 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1529 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1530 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1531 used by the enclosing expression.
1532
1533 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1534 the next.
1535
1536 @node Byte Compiling
1537 @subsection Byte Compiling
1538 @cindex Byte compiling
1539
1540 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1541 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1542 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1543 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1544 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1545
1546 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1547 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1548 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1549 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1550 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1551 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1552
1553 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1554 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1555 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1556 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1557 compilation.
1558
1559 @node Evaluation
1560 @section Evaluation
1561 @cindex Evaluation
1562
1563 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1564 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1565 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1566 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1567 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1568 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1569
1570 @menu
1571 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1572 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1573 @end menu
1574
1575 @ifnottex
1576 @node How the Interpreter Acts
1577 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1578 @end ifnottex
1579
1580 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1581 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1582 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1583 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1584 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1585 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1586 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1587 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1588 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1589
1590 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1591 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1592 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1593 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1594 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1595 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1596 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1597
1598 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1599 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1600 or else produce an error.
1601
1602 @node Evaluating Inner Lists
1603 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1604 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1605 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1606
1607 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1608 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1609 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1610 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1611 expressions.
1612
1613 @need 1250
1614 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1615 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1616
1617 @smallexample
1618 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1619 @end smallexample
1620
1621 @noindent
1622 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1623
1624 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1625 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1626 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1627 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1628 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1629
1630 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1631 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1632 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1633 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1634 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1635
1636 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1637 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1638 expression, or inside the expression.
1639
1640 @need 800
1641 Here is another copy of the expression:
1642
1643 @smallexample
1644 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1645 @end smallexample
1646
1647 @noindent
1648 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1649 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1650 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1651 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1652 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1653 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1654 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1655
1656 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1657 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1658 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1659 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1660 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1661 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1662 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1663 see in the next section.
1664
1665 @node Variables
1666 @section Variables
1667 @cindex Variables
1668
1669 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1670 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1671 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1672 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1673 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1674 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1675 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1676 @dfn{variable}.
1677
1678 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1679 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1680 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1681 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1682 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1683 ``great programming center''.
1684
1685 @ignore
1686 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1687 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1688 string; these are discussed later.)
1689 @end ignore
1690
1691 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1692 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1693 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1694 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1695 function definition, and vice-verse.
1696
1697 @menu
1698 * fill-column Example::
1699 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1700 without a function.
1701 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1702 @end menu
1703
1704 @ifnottex
1705 @node fill-column Example
1706 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1707 @end ifnottex
1708
1709 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1710 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1711 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1712 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1713 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1714 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1715 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1716 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1717 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1718
1719 @smallexample
1720 fill-column
1721 @end smallexample
1722
1723 @noindent
1724 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1725 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1726 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1727 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1728 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1729 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1730 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1731 the value is known.
1732
1733 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1734 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1735 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1736 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1737
1738 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1739 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1740 this.
1741
1742 @node Void Function
1743 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1744 @cindex Symbol without function error
1745 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1746
1747 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1748 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1749 not intend to use it as a function name.
1750
1751 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1752 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1753 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1754 Try evaluating this:
1755
1756 @smallexample
1757 (fill-column)
1758 @end smallexample
1759
1760 @need 1250
1761 @noindent
1762 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1763
1764 @smallexample
1765 @group
1766 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1767 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1768 (fill-column)
1769 eval((fill-column))
1770 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1771 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1772 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1773 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1774 @end group
1775 @end smallexample
1776
1777 @noindent
1778 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1779 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1780
1781 @ignore
1782 @need 800
1783 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1784
1785 @smallexample
1786 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1787 @end smallexample
1788
1789 @noindent
1790 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1791 another key.)
1792 @end ignore
1793
1794 @node Void Variable
1795 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1796 @cindex Symbol without value error
1797 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1798
1799 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1800 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1801 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1802 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1803 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1804
1805 @smallexample
1806 (+ 2 2)
1807 @end smallexample
1808
1809 @need 1500
1810 @noindent
1811 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1812 says:
1813
1814 @smallexample
1815 @group
1816 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1817 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1818 eval(+)
1819 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1820 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1821 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1822 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1823 @end group
1824 @end smallexample
1825
1826 @noindent
1827 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1828 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1829
1830 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1831 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1832 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1833 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1834 have a definition.
1835
1836 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1837 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1838 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1839 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1840 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1841 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1842 @code{+} by itself.
1843
1844 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1845 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1846 variable was void.
1847
1848 @ignore
1849 @need 800
1850 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1851
1852 @example
1853 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1854 @end example
1855
1856 @noindent
1857 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1858 @end ignore
1859
1860 @node Arguments
1861 @section Arguments
1862 @cindex Arguments
1863 @cindex Passing information to functions
1864
1865 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1866 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1867 as follows:
1868
1869 @smallexample
1870 (+ 2 2)
1871 @end smallexample
1872
1873 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1874 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1875 the @code{+}.
1876
1877 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1878 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1879 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1880 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1881
1882 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1883 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1884 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1885 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1886 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1887 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1888 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1889 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
1890 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1891 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1892 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1893 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
1894 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
1895 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1896 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1897 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1898 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1899 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1900 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1901
1902 @menu
1903 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1904 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
1905 of a variable or list.
1906 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
1907 variable number of arguments.
1908 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
1909 to a function.
1910 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
1911 @end menu
1912
1913 @node Data types
1914 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
1915 @cindex Data types
1916 @cindex Types of data
1917 @cindex Arguments' data types
1918
1919 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
1920 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
1921 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
1922 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
1923
1924 @need 1250
1925 @findex concat
1926 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
1927 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
1928 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
1929 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
1930 following:
1931
1932 @smallexample
1933 (concat "abc" "def")
1934 @end smallexample
1935
1936 @noindent
1937 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
1938
1939 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
1940 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
1941 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
1942 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
1943 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
1944 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
1945 punctuation) from the beginning of the string.
1946
1947 @need 800
1948 For example, if you evaluate the following:
1949
1950 @smallexample
1951 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
1952 @end smallexample
1953
1954 @noindent
1955 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
1956 string and the two numbers.
1957
1958 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
1959 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
1960 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
1961 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
1962 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
1963 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
1964 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
1965 atom such as a number or symbol.
1966
1967 @node Args as Variable or List
1968 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
1969
1970 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
1971 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
1972 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
1973
1974 @need 1250
1975 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
1976 C-e}:
1977
1978 @smallexample
1979 (+ 2 fill-column)
1980 @end smallexample
1981
1982 @noindent
1983 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
1984 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
1985 @code{fill-column} is 72.
1986
1987 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
1988 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
1989 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
1990 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
1991 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
1992 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
1993
1994 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
1995 @smallexample
1996 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
1997 @end smallexample
1998
1999 @noindent
2000 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2001 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2002 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2003 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2004 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2005 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2006 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2007
2008 @node Variable Number of Arguments
2009 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2010 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2011 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2012
2013 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2014 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2015 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2016 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2017 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2018
2019 @need 1250
2020 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2021
2022 @smallexample
2023 @group
2024 (+) @result{} 0
2025
2026 (*) @result{} 1
2027 @end group
2028 @end smallexample
2029
2030 @need 1250
2031 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2032
2033 @smallexample
2034 @group
2035 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2036
2037 (* 3) @result{} 3
2038 @end group
2039 @end smallexample
2040
2041 @need 1250
2042 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2043
2044 @smallexample
2045 @group
2046 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2047
2048 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2049 @end group
2050 @end smallexample
2051
2052 @node Wrong Type of Argument
2053 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2054 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2055 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2056
2057 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2058 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2059 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2060 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2061 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2062 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2063
2064 @smallexample
2065 (+ 2 'hello)
2066 @end smallexample
2067
2068 @noindent
2069 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2070 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2071 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2072 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2073 could not carry out its addition.
2074
2075 @need 1250
2076 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2077
2078 @noindent
2079 @smallexample
2080 @group
2081 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2082 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2083 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2084 +(2 hello)
2085 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2086 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2087 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2088 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2089 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2090 @end group
2091 @end smallexample
2092
2093 @need 1250
2094 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2095 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2096 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2097
2098 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2099 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2100 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2101 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2102
2103 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2104 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2105 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2106 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2107 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2108 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2109 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2110 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2111 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2112 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2113 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2114 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2115
2116 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2117 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2118 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2119 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2120 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2121 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2122 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2123 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2124 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2125 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2126
2127 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2128 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2129 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2130 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2131 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2132
2133 @ignore
2134 @need 1250
2135 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2136 message that says:
2137
2138 @smallexample
2139 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2140 @end smallexample
2141
2142 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2143 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2144 @end ignore
2145
2146 @node message
2147 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2148 @findex message
2149
2150 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2151 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2152 that we will describe it here.
2153
2154 @need 1250
2155 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2156 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2157
2158 @smallexample
2159 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2160 @end smallexample
2161
2162 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2163 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2164 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2165 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2166 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2167 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2168 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2169 detail}, for an example of this.)
2170
2171 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2172 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2173 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2174 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2175 @samp{%s} is.
2176
2177 @need 1250
2178 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2179 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2180
2181 @smallexample
2182 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2183 @end smallexample
2184
2185 @noindent
2186 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2187 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2188 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2189 of @code{%s}.
2190
2191 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2192 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2193 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2194
2195 @smallexample
2196 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2197 @end smallexample
2198
2199 @noindent
2200 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2201 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2202 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2203 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2204 anything that is not a number.}.
2205
2206 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2207 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2208 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2209 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2210
2211 @need 1250
2212 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2213
2214 @smallexample
2215 @group
2216 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2217 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2218 @end group
2219 @end smallexample
2220
2221 @noindent
2222 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2223 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2224
2225 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2226 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2227 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2228 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2229 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2230
2231 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2232 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2233 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2234 for @samp{%s}:
2235
2236 @smallexample
2237 @group
2238 (message "He saw %d %s"
2239 (- fill-column 32)
2240 (concat "red "
2241 (substring
2242 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2243 " leaping."))
2244 @end group
2245 @end smallexample
2246
2247 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2248 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2249 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2250 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2251 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2252 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2253
2254 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2255 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2256 area.
2257
2258 @node set & setq
2259 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2260 @cindex Variable, setting value
2261 @cindex Setting value of variable
2262
2263 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2264 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2265 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2266 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2267 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2268
2269 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2270 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2271
2272 @menu
2273 * Using set:: Setting values.
2274 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2275 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2276 @end menu
2277
2278 @node Using set
2279 @subsection Using @code{set}
2280 @findex set
2281
2282 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2283 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2284 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2285
2286 @smallexample
2287 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2288 @end smallexample
2289
2290 @noindent
2291 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2292 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2293 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2294 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2295 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2296 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2297 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2298 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2299 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2300
2301 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2302 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2303 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2304
2305 @smallexample
2306 flowers
2307 @end smallexample
2308
2309 @noindent
2310 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2311 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2312
2313 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2314 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2315 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2316
2317 @smallexample
2318 'flowers
2319 @end smallexample
2320
2321 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2322 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2323 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2324 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2325 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2326 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2327 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2328 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2329 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2330 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2331 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2332 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2333
2334 @node Using setq
2335 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2336 @findex setq
2337
2338 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2339 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2340 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2341 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2342 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2343 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2344 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2345
2346 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2347 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2348 is used:
2349
2350 @smallexample
2351 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2352 @end smallexample
2353
2354 @noindent
2355 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2356 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2357 means @code{quote}.)
2358
2359 @need 1250
2360 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2361
2362 @smallexample
2363 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2364 @end smallexample
2365
2366 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2367 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2368 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2369 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2370 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2371 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2372
2373 @smallexample
2374 @group
2375 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2376 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2377 @end group
2378 @end smallexample
2379
2380 @noindent
2381 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2382 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2383 formatted lists.)
2384
2385 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2386 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2387 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2388 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2389 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2390 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2391 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2392 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2393
2394 @node Counting
2395 @subsection Counting
2396 @cindex Counting
2397
2398 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2399 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2400 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2401 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2402 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2403 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2404 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2405 evaluated.
2406
2407 @smallexample
2408 @group
2409 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2410
2411 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2412
2413 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2414 @end group
2415 @end smallexample
2416
2417 @noindent
2418 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2419 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2420
2421 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2422 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2423 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2424 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2425 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2426 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2427 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2428 the counter will be incremented.
2429
2430 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2431 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2432 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2433 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2434 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2435 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2436 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2437 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2438 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2439
2440 @node Summary
2441 @section Summary
2442
2443 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2444 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2445 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2446
2447 @need 1000
2448 In summary,
2449
2450 @itemize @bullet
2451
2452 @item
2453 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2454
2455 @item
2456 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2457 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2458
2459 @item
2460 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2461 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2462 quotation marks, or numbers.
2463
2464 @item
2465 A number evaluates to itself.
2466
2467 @item
2468 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2469
2470 @item
2471 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2472
2473 @item
2474 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2475 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2476 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2477
2478 @item
2479 A single quotation mark,
2480 @ifinfo
2481 '
2482 @end ifinfo
2483 @ifnotinfo
2484 @code{'}
2485 @end ifnotinfo
2486 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2487 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2488 would if the quote were not there.
2489
2490 @item
2491 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2492 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2493 of which the function is the first element.
2494
2495 @item
2496 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2497 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2498 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2499 create a side effect.
2500 @end itemize
2501
2502 @node Error Message Exercises
2503 @section Exercises
2504
2505 A few simple exercises:
2506
2507 @itemize @bullet
2508 @item
2509 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2510 not within parentheses.
2511
2512 @item
2513 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2514 between parentheses.
2515
2516 @item
2517 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2518
2519 @item
2520 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2521 evaluated.
2522 @end itemize
2523
2524 @node Practicing Evaluation
2525 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2526 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2527 @cindex Evaluation practice
2528
2529 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2530 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2531 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2532 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2533 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2534 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2535 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2536 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2537
2538 @menu
2539 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2540 causes evaluation.
2541 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2542 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2543 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2544 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2545 the buffer.
2546 * Evaluation Exercise::
2547 @end menu
2548
2549 @ifnottex
2550 @node How to Evaluate
2551 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2552 @end ifnottex
2553
2554 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2555 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2556 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2557 how Emacs works.}
2558
2559 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2560 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2561 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2562 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2563 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2564 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2565 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2566 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2567 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2568 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2569
2570 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2571 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2572 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2573 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2574 will be described as we come to them.
2575
2576 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2577 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2578 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2579 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2580
2581 @node Buffer Names
2582 @section Buffer Names
2583 @findex buffer-name
2584 @findex buffer-file-name
2585
2586 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2587 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2588 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2589 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2590 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2591 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2592 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2593 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2594
2595 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2596 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2597 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2598 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2599 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2600 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2601 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2602 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2603 and is thus saved permanently.
2604
2605 @need 1250
2606 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2607 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2608 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2609
2610 @example
2611 @group
2612 (buffer-name)
2613
2614 (buffer-file-name)
2615 @end group
2616 @end example
2617
2618 @noindent
2619 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2620 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2621 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2622
2623 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2624 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2625 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2626 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2627 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2628
2629 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2630 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2631 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2632 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2633 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2634 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2635 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2636 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2637
2638 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2639 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2640 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2641
2642 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2643 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2644 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2645 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2646
2647 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2648 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2649 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2650 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2651 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2652 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2653 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2654
2655 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2656 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2657 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2658 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2659 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2660 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2661 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2662 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2663 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2664 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2665 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2666 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2667 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2668 and cultural center in its own right.
2669
2670 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2671 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2672 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2673
2674 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2675 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2676 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2677 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2678 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2679 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2680
2681 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2682 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2683 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2684 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2685 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2686 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2687 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2688 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2689
2690 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2691 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2692 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2693 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2694 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2695
2696 @smallexample
2697 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2698 @end smallexample
2699
2700 @noindent
2701 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2702 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2703 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2704 this book), this feature is very useful.
2705
2706 @node Getting Buffers
2707 @section Getting Buffers
2708 @findex current-buffer
2709 @findex other-buffer
2710 @cindex Getting a buffer
2711
2712 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2713 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2714 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2715 you get is the buffer itself.
2716
2717 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2718 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2719 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2720 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2721 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2722 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2723 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2724 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2725 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2726 @code{current-buffer}.
2727
2728 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2729 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2730 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2731 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2732 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2733 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2734 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2735
2736 @need 800
2737 Here is an expression containing the function:
2738
2739 @smallexample
2740 (current-buffer)
2741 @end smallexample
2742
2743 @noindent
2744 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2745 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2746 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2747 just its name.
2748
2749 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2750 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2751 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2752
2753 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2754 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2755 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2756 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2757 will return that buffer.
2758
2759 @need 800
2760 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2761
2762 @smallexample
2763 (other-buffer)
2764 @end smallexample
2765
2766 @noindent
2767 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2768 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2769 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2770 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2771 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2772 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2773
2774 @node Switching Buffers
2775 @section Switching Buffers
2776 @findex switch-to-buffer
2777 @findex set-buffer
2778 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2779
2780 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2781 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2782 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2783 different buffer.
2784
2785 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2786 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2787 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2788 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2789 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2790 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2791 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2792 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2793 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2794 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2795 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2796 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2797 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2798 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2799 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2800
2801 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2802 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2803 does:
2804
2805 @smallexample
2806 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2807 @end smallexample
2808
2809 @noindent
2810 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2811 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2812 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2813 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2814 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2815 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2816 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2817 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2818 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2819 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2820 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2821 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2822 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2823 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2824 following more complex expression:
2825
2826 @smallexample
2827 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2828 @end smallexample
2829
2830 @c noindent
2831 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2832 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2833 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2834 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2835 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2836 to go to another visible buffer.}
2837
2838 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2839 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2840 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2841 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2842 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2843 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2844 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2845 not need to be visible on the screen.
2846
2847 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2848 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2849 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2850 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2851 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2852 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2853 there until the command finishes running).
2854
2855 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2856 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2857 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2858 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2859 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2860 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2861 or her.
2862
2863 @node Buffer Size & Locations
2864 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2865 @cindex Size of buffer
2866 @cindex Buffer size
2867 @cindex Point location
2868 @cindex Location of point
2869
2870 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2871 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2872 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2873 the location of point within it.
2874
2875 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2876 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2877 characters in the buffer.
2878
2879 @smallexample
2880 (buffer-size)
2881 @end smallexample
2882
2883 @noindent
2884 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
2885 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2886
2887 @cindex @samp{point} defined
2888 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
2889 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
2890 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
2891 beginning of the buffer up to point.
2892
2893 @need 1250
2894 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
2895 the following expression in the usual way:
2896
2897 @smallexample
2898 (point)
2899 @end smallexample
2900
2901 @noindent
2902 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
2903 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
2904 book.
2905
2906 @need 1250
2907 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
2908 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
2909
2910 @smallexample
2911 (point)
2912 @end smallexample
2913
2914 @noindent
2915 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
2916 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
2917 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
2918 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
2919
2920 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
2921 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
2922 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
2923 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
2924 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
2925 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
2926 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
2927 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
2928 value of point in the current buffer.
2929
2930 @node Evaluation Exercise
2931 @section Exercise
2932
2933 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
2934 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
2935
2936 @node Writing Defuns
2937 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
2938 @cindex Definition writing
2939 @cindex Function definition writing
2940 @cindex Writing a function definition
2941
2942 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
2943 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
2944 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
2945 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
2946 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
2947 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
2948 symbol refers to it.)
2949
2950 @menu
2951 * Primitive Functions::
2952 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
2953 * Install:: Install a function definition.
2954 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
2955 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
2956 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
2957 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
2958 * if:: What if?
2959 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
2960 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
2961 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
2962 * Review::
2963 * defun Exercises::
2964 @end menu
2965
2966 @ifnottex
2967 @node Primitive Functions
2968 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
2969 @end ifnottex
2970 @cindex Primitive functions
2971 @cindex Functions, primitive
2972
2973 @cindex C language primitives
2974 @cindex Primitives written in C
2975 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
2976 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
2977 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
2978 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
2979 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
2980 by you) and some will be primitives written in C@. The primitive
2981 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
2982 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
2983 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
2984
2985 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
2986 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
2987 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
2988 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
2989 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
2990 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
2991
2992 @node defun
2993 @section The @code{defun} Macro
2994 @findex defun
2995
2996 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
2997 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
2998 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
2999 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3000 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3001 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}).
3002
3003 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3004 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3005 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3006 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3007 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3008 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3009 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3010 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3011
3012 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3013 @code{defun}:
3014
3015 @enumerate
3016 @item
3017 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3018 attached.
3019
3020 @item
3021 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3022 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3023 @code{()}.
3024
3025 @item
3026 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3027 strongly recommended.)
3028
3029 @item
3030 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3031 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3032 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3033
3034 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3035 @item
3036 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3037 function definition.
3038 @end enumerate
3039
3040 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3041 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3042
3043 @smallexample
3044 @group
3045 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3046 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3047 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3048 @var{body}@dots{})
3049 @end group
3050 @end smallexample
3051
3052 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3053 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3054 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3055
3056 @smallexample
3057 @group
3058 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3059 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3060 (* 7 number))
3061 @end group
3062 @end smallexample
3063
3064 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3065 followed by the name of the function.
3066
3067 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3068 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3069 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3070 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3071 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3072 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3073 function.
3074
3075 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3076 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3077 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3078 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3079 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3080 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3081 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3082 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3083 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3084 the function clear.
3085
3086 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3087 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3088 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3089 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3090 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3091 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3092 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3093 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3094 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3095 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3096 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3097 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3098
3099 @ignore
3100 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3101 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3102 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3103 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3104 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3105 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3106 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3107 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3108 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3109 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3110 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3111 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3112 @end ignore
3113
3114 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3115 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3116 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3117 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3118 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3119 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3120 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3121 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3122 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3123 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3124 write.
3125
3126 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3127 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3128 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3129 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3130 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3131 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3132 function for addition.)
3133
3134 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3135 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3136 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3137 to evaluate this yet!
3138
3139 @smallexample
3140 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3141 @end smallexample
3142
3143 @noindent
3144 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3145 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3146 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3147 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3148 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3149 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3150 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3151 definition begins.
3152
3153 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3154 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3155 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3156 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3157 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3158 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3159 section.
3160
3161 @node Install
3162 @section Install a Function Definition
3163 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3164 @cindex Definition installation
3165 @cindex Function definition installation
3166
3167 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3168 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3169 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3170 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3171 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3172 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3173 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3174 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3175 action installs the function definition.
3176
3177 @smallexample
3178 @group
3179 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3180 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3181 (* 7 number))
3182 @end group
3183 @end smallexample
3184
3185 @noindent
3186 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3187 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3188 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3189 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3190 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3191 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3192
3193 @menu
3194 * Effect of installation::
3195 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3196 @end menu
3197
3198 @ifnottex
3199 @node Effect of installation
3200 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3201 @end ifnottex
3202
3203 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3204 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3205 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3206 echo area.
3207
3208 @smallexample
3209 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3210 @end smallexample
3211
3212 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3213 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3214 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3215 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3216
3217 @smallexample
3218 @group
3219 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3220 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3221
3222 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3223 @end group
3224 @end smallexample
3225
3226 @noindent
3227 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3228
3229 @node Change a defun
3230 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3231 @cindex Changing a function definition
3232 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3233 @cindex Definition, how to change
3234
3235 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3236 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3237 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3238 very simple.
3239
3240 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3241 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3242 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3243 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3244 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3245 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3246 version''.
3247
3248 @smallexample
3249 @group
3250 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3251 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3252 (+ number number number number number number number))
3253 @end group
3254 @end smallexample
3255
3256 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3257 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3258 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3259 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3260 each line with a semicolon.
3261
3262 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3263 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3264 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3265
3266 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3267 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3268 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3269
3270 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3271 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3272 install it again.
3273
3274 @node Interactive
3275 @section Make a Function Interactive
3276 @cindex Interactive functions
3277 @findex interactive
3278
3279 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3280 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3281 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3282 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3283 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3284 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3285
3286 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3287 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3288 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3289 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3290 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3291 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3292
3293 @menu
3294 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3295 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3296 @end menu
3297
3298 @ifnottex
3299 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven
3300 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3301 @end ifnottex
3302
3303 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3304 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3305 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3306
3307 @need 1250
3308 Here is the code:
3309
3310 @smallexample
3311 @group
3312 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3313 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3314 (interactive "p")
3315 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3316 @end group
3317 @end smallexample
3318
3319 @noindent
3320 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3321 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3322 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3323 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3324 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3325 echo area.
3326
3327 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3328 ways:
3329
3330 @enumerate
3331 @item
3332 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3333 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3334 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3335
3336 @item
3337 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3338 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3339 @end enumerate
3340
3341 @noindent
3342 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3343 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3344 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3345
3346 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3347 to a key.)
3348
3349 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3350 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3351 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3352 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3353
3354 @node multiply-by-seven in detail
3355 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3356
3357 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3358 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3359 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3360 looks like this:
3361
3362 @smallexample
3363 @group
3364 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3365 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3366 (interactive "p")
3367 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3368 @end group
3369 @end smallexample
3370
3371 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3372 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3373 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3374
3375 @need 1000
3376 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3377 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3378
3379 @smallexample
3380 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3381 @end smallexample
3382
3383 @need 1250
3384 @noindent
3385 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3386 evaluate the line as if it were:
3387
3388 @smallexample
3389 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3390 @end smallexample
3391
3392 @noindent
3393 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3394 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3395 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3396 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3397 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3398
3399 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3400 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3401 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3402 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3403 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3404 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3405 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3406 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3407 sequence is located.
3408
3409 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3410 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3411 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3412 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3413 is 35}.
3414
3415 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3416 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3417 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3418 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3419 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3420 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3421 quotes.)
3422
3423 @node Interactive Options
3424 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3425 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3426 @cindex Interactive options
3427
3428 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3429 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3430 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3431 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3432 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3433 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3434 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3435 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3436 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3437
3438 @need 1250
3439 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3440 is
3441
3442 @smallexample
3443 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3444 @end smallexample
3445
3446 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3447 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3448 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3449 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3450 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3451 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3452 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3453 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3454 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3455 character, but no more.
3456
3457 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3458
3459 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3460 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3461 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3462 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3463 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3464 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3465 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3466 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3467 is one) and the character.
3468
3469 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3470 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3471 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3472
3473 @smallexample
3474 @group
3475 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3476 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3477 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3478 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3479 @end group
3480 @end smallexample
3481
3482 @noindent
3483 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3484 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3485 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3486
3487 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3488 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3489 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3490 this.
3491
3492 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3493 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3494 a list.
3495
3496 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3497 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3498 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3499 explanation about this technique.
3500
3501 @node Permanent Installation
3502 @section Install Code Permanently
3503 @cindex Install code permanently
3504 @cindex Permanent code installation
3505 @cindex Code installation
3506
3507 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3508 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3509 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3510 function definition again.
3511
3512 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3513 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3514 doing this:
3515
3516 @itemize @bullet
3517 @item
3518 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3519 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3520 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3521 the function definitions within it are installed.
3522 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3523
3524 @item
3525 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3526 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3527 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3528 functions in the files.
3529 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3530
3531 @item
3532 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3533 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3534 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3535 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3536 distribution.)
3537 @end itemize
3538
3539 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3540 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3541 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3542 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3543 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3544 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3545 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3546 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3547 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3548
3549 @node let
3550 @section @code{let}
3551 @findex let
3552
3553 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3554 to use in most function definitions.
3555
3556 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3557 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3558 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3559
3560 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3561 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3562 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3563 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3564 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3565 different house.
3566
3567 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3568 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3569 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3570 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3571 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3572 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3573
3574 @menu
3575 * Prevent confusion::
3576 * Parts of let Expression::
3577 * Sample let Expression::
3578 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3579 @end menu
3580
3581 @ifnottex
3582 @node Prevent confusion
3583 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3584 @end ifnottex
3585
3586 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3587 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3588 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3589 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3590 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3591 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3592 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3593 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
3594
3595 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3596 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3597 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3598 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3599
3600 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3601 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3602 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3603 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3604 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3605 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3606 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3607
3608 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3609 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3610 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3611 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3612 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3613 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3614 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3615 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3616 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3617 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3618 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3619
3620 @node Parts of let Expression
3621 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3622 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3623 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3624
3625 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3626 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3627 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3628 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3629 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3630 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3631 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3632
3633 @need 800
3634 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3635
3636 @smallexample
3637 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3638 @end smallexample
3639
3640 @noindent
3641 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3642 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3643 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3644 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3645 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3646
3647 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3648 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3649 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3650 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3651
3652 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3653 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3654 template.
3655
3656 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3657 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3658
3659 @smallexample
3660 @group
3661 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3662 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3663 @dots{})
3664 @var{body}@dots{})
3665 @end group
3666 @end smallexample
3667
3668 @node Sample let Expression
3669 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3670 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3671 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3672
3673 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3674 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3675 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3676
3677 @smallexample
3678 @group
3679 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3680 (tiger 'fierce))
3681 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3682 zebra tiger))
3683 @end group
3684 @end smallexample
3685
3686 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3687
3688 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3689 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3690 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3691 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3692 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3693 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3694 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3695 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3696 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3697 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3698 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3699 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3700 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3701 in the echo area.
3702
3703 @need 1500
3704 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3705 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3706 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3707
3708 @smallexample
3709 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3710 @end smallexample
3711
3712 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3713 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3714 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3715 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3716 second @samp{%s}.
3717
3718 @node Uninitialized let Variables
3719 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3720 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3721 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3722
3723 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3724 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3725 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3726
3727 @smallexample
3728 @group
3729 (let ((birch 3)
3730 pine
3731 fir
3732 (oak 'some))
3733 (message
3734 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3735 birch pine fir oak))
3736 @end group
3737 @end smallexample
3738
3739 @noindent
3740 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3741
3742 @need 1250
3743 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3744 appear in your echo area:
3745
3746 @smallexample
3747 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3748 @end smallexample
3749
3750 @noindent
3751 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3752 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3753 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3754
3755 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3756 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3757 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3758 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3759 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3760 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3761 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3762 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3763 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3764 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3765
3766 @node if
3767 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3768 @findex if
3769 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3770
3771 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3772 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3773 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3774 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3775 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3776 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3777
3778 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3779 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3780 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3781 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3782
3783 @menu
3784 * if in more detail::
3785 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3786 @end menu
3787
3788 @ifnottex
3789 @node if in more detail
3790 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3791 @end ifnottex
3792
3793 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3794 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3795 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3796 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3797 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3798 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3799 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3800
3801 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3802 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3803 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3804 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3805 expression easier to read.
3806
3807 @smallexample
3808 @group
3809 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3810 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3811 @end group
3812 @end smallexample
3813
3814 @noindent
3815 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3816 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3817
3818 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3819 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3820 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 @group
3824 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3825 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3826 @end group
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 @noindent
3830 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3831 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3832 @findex > (greater than)
3833
3834 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3835 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3836 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3837 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3838 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3839
3840 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3841 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3842 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3843 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3844 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3845
3846 @smallexample
3847 @group
3848 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3849 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3850 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3851 then warn of a tiger."
3852 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3853 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3854 @end group
3855 @end smallexample
3856
3857 @need 1500
3858 @noindent
3859 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3860 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3861 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3862
3863 @smallexample
3864 @group
3865 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3866
3867 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
3868
3869 @end group
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
3873 @noindent
3874 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
3875 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
3876 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
3877 printed in the echo area.
3878
3879 @node type-of-animal in detail
3880 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
3881
3882 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
3883
3884 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
3885 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
3886 a second for an @code{if} expression.
3887
3888 @need 1250
3889 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
3890
3891 @smallexample
3892 @group
3893 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
3894 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3895 @var{body}@dots{})
3896 @end group
3897 @end smallexample
3898
3899 @need 800
3900 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
3901
3902 @smallexample
3903 @group
3904 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3905 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3906 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3907 then warn of a tiger."
3908 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
3909 @end group
3910 @end smallexample
3911
3912 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
3913 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
3914 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
3915 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
3916 every function definition. The body of the function definition
3917 consists of the @code{if} expression.
3918
3919 @need 800
3920 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
3921
3922 @smallexample
3923 @group
3924 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3925 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
3926 @end group
3927 @end smallexample
3928
3929 @need 1250
3930 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
3931 looks like this:
3932
3933 @smallexample
3934 @group
3935 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3936 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3937 @end group
3938 @end smallexample
3939
3940 @need 800
3941 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
3942
3943 @smallexample
3944 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3945 @end smallexample
3946
3947 @noindent
3948 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
3949 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
3950 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
3951 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
3952 this function.
3953
3954 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
3955 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
3956 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
3957 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
3958 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
3959 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
3960
3961 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
3962 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
3963 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
3964 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
3965
3966 @node else
3967 @section If--then--else Expressions
3968 @cindex Else
3969
3970 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
3971 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
3972 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
3973 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
3974 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
3975 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
3976 the beach, else read a book!''.
3977
3978 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
3979 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
3980 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
3981 indented less than the then-part:
3982
3983 @smallexample
3984 @group
3985 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3986 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
3987 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
3988 @end group
3989 @end smallexample
3990
3991 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
3992 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
3993
3994 @smallexample
3995 @group
3996 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
3997 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
3998 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
3999 @end group
4000 @end smallexample
4001
4002 @noindent
4003 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4004 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4005 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4006 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4007
4008 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4009 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4010 expression.
4011
4012 @need 1500
4013 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4014 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4015 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4016 arguments to the function.
4017
4018 @smallexample
4019 @group
4020 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4021 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4022 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4023 then warn of a tiger;
4024 else say it's not fierce."
4025 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4026 (message "It's a tiger!")
4027 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4028 @end group
4029 @end smallexample
4030 @sp 1
4031
4032 @smallexample
4033 @group
4034 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4035
4036 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4037
4038 @end group
4039 @end smallexample
4040
4041 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4042 @noindent
4043 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4044 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4045 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4046 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4047
4048 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4049 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4050 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4051 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4052 and write your program accordingly.)
4053
4054 @node Truth & Falsehood
4055 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4056 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4057 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4058 @findex nil
4059
4060 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4061 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4062 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4063 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4064 at all---is `true'.
4065
4066 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4067 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4068 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4069 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4070 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4071 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4072
4073 @menu
4074 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4075 @end menu
4076
4077 @ifnottex
4078 @node nil explained
4079 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4080 @end ifnottex
4081
4082 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4083
4084 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4085 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4086 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4087 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4088 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4089 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4090
4091 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4092 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4093 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4094 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4095 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4096 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4097 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4098 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4099
4100 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4101
4102 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4103 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4104 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4105 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4106 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4107 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4108
4109 @smallexample
4110 @group
4111 (if 4
4112 'true
4113 'false)
4114 @end group
4115
4116 @group
4117 (if nil
4118 'true
4119 'false)
4120 @end group
4121 @end smallexample
4122
4123 @need 1250
4124 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4125 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4126 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4127 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4128
4129 @smallexample
4130 (> 5 4)
4131 @end smallexample
4132
4133 @need 1250
4134 @noindent
4135 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4136
4137 @smallexample
4138 (> 4 5)
4139 @end smallexample
4140
4141 @node save-excursion
4142 @section @code{save-excursion}
4143 @findex save-excursion
4144 @cindex Region, what it is
4145 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4146 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4147 @findex point
4148 @findex mark
4149
4150 The @code{save-excursion} function is the third and final special form
4151 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4152
4153 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4154 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4155 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4156 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4157 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4158 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4159
4160 @menu
4161 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4162 * Template for save-excursion::
4163 @end menu
4164
4165 @ifnottex
4166 @node Point and mark
4167 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4168 @end ifnottex
4169
4170 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4171 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4172 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4173 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4174 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4175 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4176 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4177 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4178 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4179
4180 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4181 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4182 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4183 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4184 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4185 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4186 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4187 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4188 times.
4189
4190 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4191 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4192 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4193 @code{print-region}.
4194
4195 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4196 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4197 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4198 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4199 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4200 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4201 evaluated.
4202
4203 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4204 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4205 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4206 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4207 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4208 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4209 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4210
4211 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4212 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4213 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4214 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4215
4216 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4217 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4218 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4219 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4220 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4221 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4222
4223 @node Template for save-excursion
4224 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4225
4226 @need 800
4227 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4228
4229 @smallexample
4230 @group
4231 (save-excursion
4232 @var{body}@dots{})
4233 @end group
4234 @end smallexample
4235
4236 @noindent
4237 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4238 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4239 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4240 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4241 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4242 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4243 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4244
4245 @need 1250
4246 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4247 looks like this:
4248
4249 @smallexample
4250 @group
4251 (save-excursion
4252 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4253 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4254 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4255 @dots{}
4256 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4257 @end group
4258 @end smallexample
4259
4260 @noindent
4261 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4262
4263 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4264 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4265
4266 @smallexample
4267 @group
4268 (let @var{varlist}
4269 (save-excursion
4270 @var{body}@dots{}))
4271 @end group
4272 @end smallexample
4273
4274 @node Review
4275 @section Review
4276
4277 In the last few chapters we have introduced a macro and a fair number
4278 of functions and special forms. Here they are described in brief,
4279 along with a few similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4280
4281 @table @code
4282 @item eval-last-sexp
4283 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4284 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4285 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4286 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4287
4288 @item defun
4289 Define function. This macro has up to five parts: the name, a
4290 template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4291 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of
4292 the definition.
4293
4294 @need 1250
4295 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4296 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4297 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4298
4299 @smallexample
4300 @group
4301 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4302 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4303 (interactive)
4304 (beginning-of-line 1)
4305 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4306 @end group
4307 @end smallexample
4308
4309 @ignore
4310 In GNU Emacs 22,
4311
4312 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4313 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4314 (interactive "p")
4315 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4316 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4317
4318 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4319 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4320 (interactive)
4321 (beginning-of-line 1)
4322 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4323 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4324 (backward-prefix-chars))
4325 @end ignore
4326
4327 @item interactive
4328 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4329 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4330 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4331 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4332 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4333 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4334
4335 @need 1000
4336 Common code characters are:
4337
4338 @table @code
4339 @item b
4340 The name of an existing buffer.
4341
4342 @item f
4343 The name of an existing file.
4344
4345 @item p
4346 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4347
4348 @item r
4349 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4350 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4351 rather than one.
4352 @end table
4353
4354 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4355 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4356 code characters.
4357
4358 @item let
4359 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4360 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4361 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4362 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4363 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4364 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4365 @code{let}.
4366
4367 @need 1250
4368 For example,
4369
4370 @smallexample
4371 @group
4372 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4373 (bar (buffer-size)))
4374 (message
4375 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4376 foo bar))
4377 @end group
4378 @end smallexample
4379
4380 @item save-excursion
4381 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4382 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4383 and mark and buffer afterward.
4384
4385 @need 1250
4386 For example,
4387
4388 @smallexample
4389 @group
4390 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4391 (- (point)
4392 (save-excursion
4393 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4394 @end group
4395 @end smallexample
4396
4397 @item if
4398 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4399 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4400
4401 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4402 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4403 commonly used.
4404
4405 @need 1250
4406 For example,
4407
4408 @smallexample
4409 @group
4410 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4411 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4412 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4413 @end group
4414 @end smallexample
4415
4416 @need 1250
4417 @item <
4418 @itemx >
4419 @itemx <=
4420 @itemx >=
4421 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4422 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4423 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4424 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4425 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4426 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4427 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4428
4429 @need 800
4430 @item =
4431 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4432 markers, are equal.
4433
4434 @need 1250
4435 @item equal
4436 @itemx eq
4437 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4438 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4439 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4440 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4441 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4442 @findex equal
4443 @findex eq
4444
4445 @need 1250
4446 @item string<
4447 @itemx string-lessp
4448 @itemx string=
4449 @itemx string-equal
4450 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4451 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4452 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4453
4454 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4455 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4456 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4457
4458 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4459 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4460 smaller than any string of characters.
4461
4462 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4463 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4464 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4465
4466 @item message
4467 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4468 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4469 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4470 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4471 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4472 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4473 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4474
4475 @item setq
4476 @itemx set
4477 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4478 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4479 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4480 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4481 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4482 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4483
4484 @item buffer-name
4485 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4486
4487 @item buffer-file-name
4488 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4489 visiting.
4490
4491 @item current-buffer
4492 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4493 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4494
4495 @item other-buffer
4496 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4497 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4498 buffer).
4499
4500 @item switch-to-buffer
4501 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4502 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4503
4504 @item set-buffer
4505 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4506 alter what the window is showing.
4507
4508 @item buffer-size
4509 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4510
4511 @item point
4512 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4513 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4514 buffer.
4515
4516 @item point-min
4517 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4518 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4519
4520 @item point-max
4521 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4522 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4523 effect.
4524 @end table
4525
4526 @need 1500
4527 @node defun Exercises
4528 @section Exercises
4529
4530 @itemize @bullet
4531 @item
4532 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4533 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4534
4535 @item
4536 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4537 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4538 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4539 @end itemize
4540
4541 @node Buffer Walk Through
4542 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4543
4544 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4545 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4546 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4547 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4548 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4549 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4550 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4551
4552 @menu
4553 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4554 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4555 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4556 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4557 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4558 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4559 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4560 * Buffer Exercises::
4561 @end menu
4562
4563 @node Finding More
4564 @section Finding More Information
4565
4566 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4567 @cindex Find function documentation
4568 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4569 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4570 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4571 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4572 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4573 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4574 then @key{RET}).
4575
4576 @cindex Find source of function
4577 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4578 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4579 function definition.
4580
4581 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4582 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4583 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4584 you directly to the function definition.
4585
4586 @ignore
4587 Not In version 22
4588
4589 If you move point over the file name and press
4590 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4591 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4592 definition.
4593 @end ignore
4594
4595 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4596 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4597 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4598 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4599 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4600 Texinfo source file of this document.
4601 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4602 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4603 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4604
4605 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4606 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4607 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4608 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4609 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4610 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4611 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4612 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4613 @key{ALT}.)
4614
4615 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4616 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4617 @findex find-tag
4618 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4619 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4620 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4621 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4622 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4623 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4624 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4625 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4626 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4627 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4628
4629 @need 1250
4630 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4631 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4632 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4633 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4634
4635 @smallexample
4636 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4637 @end smallexample
4638
4639 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4640
4641 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4642 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4643 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4644
4645 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4646 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4647 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4648 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4649 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4650 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4651 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4652 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4653 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4654 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4655 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4656 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4657 by topic keywords.''
4658
4659 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4660 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4661 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4662
4663 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4664 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4665 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4666 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4667 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4668
4669 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4670 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4671 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4672 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4673 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4674 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4675
4676 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4677 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4678 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4679 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4680 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4681 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4682 of the buffer.
4683
4684 @need 1250
4685 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4686
4687 @smallexample
4688 @group
4689 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4690 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4691 leave mark at previous position."
4692 (interactive)
4693 (push-mark)
4694 (goto-char (point-min)))
4695 @end group
4696 @end smallexample
4697
4698 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4699 the macro @code{defun}:
4700
4701 @enumerate
4702 @item
4703 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4704
4705 @item
4706 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4707
4708 @item
4709 The documentation string.
4710
4711 @item
4712 The interactive expression.
4713
4714 @item
4715 The body.
4716 @end enumerate
4717
4718 @noindent
4719 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4720 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4721 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4722 an optional argument.)
4723
4724 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4725 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4726 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4727 require one.
4728
4729 @need 800
4730 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4731
4732 @smallexample
4733 @group
4734 (push-mark)
4735 (goto-char (point-min))
4736 @end group
4737 @end smallexample
4738
4739 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4740 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4741 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4742 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4743
4744 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4745 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4746 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4747 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4748 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4749
4750 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4751 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4752 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4753 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4754
4755 That is all there is to the function definition!
4756
4757 @findex describe-function
4758 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4759 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4760 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4761 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4762 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4763 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4764 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4765
4766 @smallexample
4767 @group
4768 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4769 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4770 @end group
4771 @end smallexample
4772
4773 @noindent
4774 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4775
4776 @noindent
4777 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4778 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4779 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4780 @key{RET}}.)
4781
4782 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4783 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4784 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4785 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4786
4787 @node mark-whole-buffer
4788 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4789 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4790
4791 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4792 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4793 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4794
4795 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4796 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4797 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4798 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4799 h}.
4800
4801 @menu
4802 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4803 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4804 @end menu
4805
4806 @ifnottex
4807 @node mark-whole-buffer overview
4808 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4809 @end ifnottex
4810
4811 @need 1250
4812 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4813
4814 @smallexample
4815 @group
4816 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4817 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4818 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4819 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4820 that uses or sets the mark."
4821 (interactive)
4822 (push-mark (point))
4823 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4824 (goto-char (point-min)))
4825 @end group
4826 @end smallexample
4827
4828 @need 1250
4829 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4830 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4831 this:
4832
4833 @smallexample
4834 @group
4835 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4836 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4837 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4838 @var{body}@dots{})
4839 @end group
4840 @end smallexample
4841
4842 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4843 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4844 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4845 The documentation comes next.
4846
4847 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4848 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4849 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4850 previous section.
4851
4852 @need 1250
4853 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer
4854 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4855
4856 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4857 lines of code:
4858
4859 @c GNU Emacs 22
4860 @smallexample
4861 @group
4862 (push-mark (point))
4863 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4864 (goto-char (point-min))
4865 @end group
4866 @end smallexample
4867
4868 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
4869
4870 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
4871 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
4872 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
4873 at the current position of the cursor.
4874
4875 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
4876 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
4877 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
4878 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
4879 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
4880 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
4881 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
4882 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
4883 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
4884 there.
4885
4886 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
4887 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
4888 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
4889 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
4890 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
4891 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
4892 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
4893 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
4894 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
4895 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
4896 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
4897
4898 @need 1250
4899 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
4900 The line reads
4901
4902 @smallexample
4903 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4904 @end smallexample
4905
4906 @noindent
4907 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
4908 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
4909 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
4910 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
4911 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
4912 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
4913 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
4914 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
4915 region. It is often turned off.
4916
4917 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
4918 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
4919 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
4920 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
4921 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
4922 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
4923 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
4924 region.
4925
4926 @node append-to-buffer
4927 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
4928 @findex append-to-buffer
4929
4930 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
4931 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
4932 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
4933 current buffer to a specified buffer.
4934
4935 @menu
4936 * append-to-buffer overview::
4937 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
4938 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
4939 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
4940 @end menu
4941
4942 @ifnottex
4943 @node append-to-buffer overview
4944 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
4945 @end ifnottex
4946
4947 @findex insert-buffer-substring
4948 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
4949 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
4950 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
4951 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
4952 inserts them into another buffer.
4953
4954 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
4955 concerned with setting up the conditions for
4956 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
4957 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
4958 to, and the region that will be copied.
4959
4960 @need 1250
4961 Here is the complete text of the function:
4962
4963 @smallexample
4964 @group
4965 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
4966 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
4967 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
4968 @end group
4969
4970 @group
4971 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
4972 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
4973 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
4974 (interactive
4975 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
4976 (current-buffer) t))
4977 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
4978 @end group
4979 @group
4980 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
4981 (save-excursion
4982 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
4983 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
4984 point)
4985 (set-buffer append-to)
4986 (setq point (point))
4987 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
4988 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
4989 (dolist (window windows)
4990 (when (= (window-point window) point)
4991 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
4992 @end group
4993 @end smallexample
4994
4995 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
4996 filled-in templates.
4997
4998 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
4999 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5000
5001 @smallexample
5002 @group
5003 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5004 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5005 (interactive @dots{})
5006 @var{body}@dots{})
5007 @end group
5008 @end smallexample
5009
5010 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5011 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5012 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5013 will be copied.
5014
5015 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5016 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5017 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5018 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5019
5020 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5021 name. (The function can handle either.)
5022
5023 @node append interactive
5024 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5025
5026 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5027 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5028 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5029 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5030
5031 @smallexample
5032 @group
5033 (interactive
5034 (list (read-buffer
5035 "Append to buffer: "
5036 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5037 (region-beginning)
5038 (region-end)))
5039 @end group
5040 @end smallexample
5041
5042 @noindent
5043 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5044 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5045
5046 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5047 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5048 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5049 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5050 provide if you don't specify anything.
5051
5052 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5053 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5054 for true.
5055
5056 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5057 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5058 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5059 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5060 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5061
5062 @need 1250
5063 The expression looks like this:
5064
5065 @smallexample
5066 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5067 @end smallexample
5068
5069 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5070 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5071 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5072
5073 @need 1250
5074 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5075 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5076
5077 @smallexample
5078 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5079 @end smallexample
5080
5081 @noindent
5082 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5083 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5084
5085 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5086 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5087 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5088 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5089 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5090
5091 @node append-to-buffer body
5092 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5093
5094 @ignore
5095 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5096
5097 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5098 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5099 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5100
5101 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5102 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5103 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5104 (interactive
5105 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5106 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5107 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5108 (save-excursion
5109 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5110 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5111 point)
5112 (set-buffer append-to)
5113 (setq point (point))
5114 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5115 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5116 (dolist (window windows)
5117 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5118 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5119 @end ignore
5120
5121 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5122
5123 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5124 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5125 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5126 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5127 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5128
5129 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5130 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5131 @code{let} expression in outline:
5132
5133 @smallexample
5134 @group
5135 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5136 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5137 (interactive @dots{})
5138 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5139 @var{body}@dots{})
5140 @end group
5141 @end smallexample
5142
5143 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5144
5145 @enumerate
5146 @item
5147 The symbol @code{let};
5148
5149 @item
5150 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5151 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5152
5153 @item
5154 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5155 @end enumerate
5156
5157 @need 800
5158 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5159
5160 @smallexample
5161 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5162 @end smallexample
5163
5164 @noindent
5165 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5166 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5167 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5168 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5169 which you will copy.
5170
5171 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5172 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5173 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5174 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5175 The line looks like this:
5176
5177 @smallexample
5178 @group
5179 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5180 @dots{} )
5181 @end group
5182 @end smallexample
5183
5184 @noindent
5185 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5186 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5187 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5188 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5189
5190 @node append save-excursion
5191 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5192
5193 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5194 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5195
5196 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5197 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5198 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5199 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5200 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5201 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5202
5203 @need 1500
5204 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5205 @cindex Formatting convention
5206 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5207 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5208 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5209 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5210 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5211 this:
5212
5213 @smallexample
5214 @group
5215 (defun @dots{}
5216 @dots{}
5217 @dots{}
5218 (let@dots{}
5219 (save-excursion
5220 @dots{}
5221 @end group
5222 @end smallexample
5223
5224 @need 1500
5225 @noindent
5226 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5227 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5228 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5229 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5230 with the @code{let}:
5231
5232 @smallexample
5233 @group
5234 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5235 (save-excursion
5236 @dots{}
5237 (set-buffer @dots{})
5238 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5239 @dots{}))
5240 @end group
5241 @end smallexample
5242
5243 @need 1200
5244 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5245 of filling in the slots of a template:
5246
5247 @smallexample
5248 @group
5249 (save-excursion
5250 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5251 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5252 @dots{}
5253 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5254 @end group
5255 @end smallexample
5256
5257 @need 1200
5258 @noindent
5259 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5260 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5261 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5262 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5263 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5264
5265 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5266 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5267 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5268
5269 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5270 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5271 function.
5272
5273 @need 1250
5274 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5275
5276 @smallexample
5277 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5278 @end smallexample
5279
5280 @need 1250
5281 @noindent
5282 but now it is
5283
5284 @smallexample
5285 (set-buffer append-to)
5286 @end smallexample
5287
5288 @noindent
5289 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5290 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5291 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5292 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5293
5294 @ignore
5295 in GNU Emacs 22
5296
5297 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5298 (save-excursion
5299 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5300 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5301 point)
5302 (set-buffer append-to)
5303 (setq point (point))
5304 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5305 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5306 (dolist (window windows)
5307 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5308 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5309 @end ignore
5310
5311 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5312 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5313 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5314 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5315 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5316 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5317 @code{current-buffer}.
5318
5319 @need 1250
5320 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5321
5322 @smallexample
5323 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5324 @end smallexample
5325
5326 @noindent
5327 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5328 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5329 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5330 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5331 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5332 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5333 command.
5334
5335 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5336 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5337 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5338
5339 @need 800
5340 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5341
5342 @smallexample
5343 @group
5344 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5345 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5346 @var{change-buffer}
5347 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5348
5349 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5350 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5351 @end group
5352 @end smallexample
5353
5354 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5355 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5356 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5357 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5358 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5359 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5360
5361 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5362 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5363 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5364 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5365 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5366
5367 @node Buffer Related Review
5368 @section Review
5369
5370 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5371
5372 @table @code
5373 @item describe-function
5374 @itemx describe-variable
5375 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5376 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5377
5378 @item find-tag
5379 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5380 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5381 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5382 @key{META} key).
5383
5384 @item save-excursion
5385 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5386 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5387 the current buffer and return to it.
5388
5389 @item push-mark
5390 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5391 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5392 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5393
5394 @item goto-char
5395 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5396 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5397 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5398
5399 @item insert-buffer-substring
5400 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5401 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5402
5403 @item mark-whole-buffer
5404 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5405
5406 @item set-buffer
5407 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5408 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5409 to work on a different buffer.
5410
5411 @item get-buffer-create
5412 @itemx get-buffer
5413 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5414 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5415 buffer does not exist.
5416 @end table
5417
5418 @need 1500
5419 @node Buffer Exercises
5420 @section Exercises
5421
5422 @itemize @bullet
5423 @item
5424 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5425 then test it to see whether it works.
5426
5427 @item
5428 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5429 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5430
5431 @item
5432 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5433 function.
5434 @end itemize
5435
5436 @node More Complex
5437 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5438
5439 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5440 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5441 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5442 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5443 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5444 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5445 to which the name refers.
5446
5447 @menu
5448 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5449 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5450 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5451 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5452 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5453 * optional Exercise::
5454 @end menu
5455
5456 @node copy-to-buffer
5457 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5458 @findex copy-to-buffer
5459
5460 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5461 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5462 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5463 previous text in the second buffer.
5464
5465 @need 800
5466 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5467
5468 @smallexample
5469 @group
5470 @dots{}
5471 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5472 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5473 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5474 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5475 (erase-buffer)
5476 (save-excursion
5477 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5478 @end group
5479 @end smallexample
5480
5481 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5482 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5483
5484 @need 800
5485 The definition then says
5486
5487 @smallexample
5488 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5489 @end smallexample
5490
5491 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5492 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5493 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5494 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5495 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5496 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5497
5498 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5499 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5500 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5501 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5502 mechanism.)
5503
5504 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5505 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5506
5507 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5508 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5509
5510 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5511 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5512 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5513 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5514 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5515 @code{oldbuf}).
5516
5517 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5518 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5519
5520 @need 1250
5521 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5522
5523 @smallexample
5524 @group
5525 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5526 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5527 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5528 (erase-buffer)
5529 (save-excursion
5530 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5531 @end group
5532 @end smallexample
5533
5534 @node insert-buffer
5535 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5536 @findex insert-buffer
5537
5538 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5539 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5540 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5541 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5542
5543 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5544 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5545
5546 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5547 a discussion of the new body.)
5548
5549 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5550 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5551 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5552
5553 @menu
5554 * insert-buffer code::
5555 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5556 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5557 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5558 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5559 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5560 * New insert-buffer::
5561 @end menu
5562
5563 @ifnottex
5564 @node insert-buffer code
5565 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5566 @end ifnottex
5567
5568 @need 800
5569 Here is the earlier code:
5570
5571 @smallexample
5572 @group
5573 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5574 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5575 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5576 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5577 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5578 @end group
5579 @group
5580 (or (bufferp buffer)
5581 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5582 (let (start end newmark)
5583 (save-excursion
5584 (save-excursion
5585 (set-buffer buffer)
5586 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5587 @end group
5588 @group
5589 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5590 (setq newmark (point)))
5591 (push-mark newmark)))
5592 @end group
5593 @end smallexample
5594
5595 @need 1200
5596 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5597 outline of the function:
5598
5599 @smallexample
5600 @group
5601 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5602 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5603 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5604 @var{body}@dots{})
5605 @end group
5606 @end smallexample
5607
5608 @node insert-buffer interactive
5609 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5610 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5611
5612 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5613 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5614 buffer:@: }.
5615
5616 @menu
5617 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5618 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5619 @end menu
5620
5621 @node Read-only buffer
5622 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5623 @cindex Read-only buffer
5624 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5625 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5626
5627 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5628 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5629 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5630 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5631 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5632 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5633 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5634
5635 @node b for interactive
5636 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5637
5638 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5639 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5640 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5641 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5642 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5643 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5644 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5645 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5646 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5647 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5648 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5649
5650 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5651 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5652 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5653 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5654
5655 @node insert-buffer body
5656 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5657
5658 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5659 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5660 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5661 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5662 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5663 into the current buffer.
5664
5665 @need 1250
5666 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5667 function like this:
5668
5669 @smallexample
5670 @group
5671 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5672 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5673 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5674 (or @dots{}
5675 @dots{}
5676 @end group
5677 @group
5678 (let (@var{varlist})
5679 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5680 @end group
5681 @end smallexample
5682
5683 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5684 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5685 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5686
5687 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5688 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5689
5690 @node if & or
5691 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5692
5693 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5694 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5695 then the buffer itself must be got.
5696
5697 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5698 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5699 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5700 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5701
5702 @need 800
5703 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5704
5705 @smallexample
5706 @group
5707 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5708 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5709 @end group
5710 @end smallexample
5711
5712 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5713 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5714
5715 @need 1200
5716 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5717 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5718
5719 @smallexample
5720 @group
5721 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5722 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5723 @end group
5724 @end smallexample
5725
5726 @noindent
5727 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5728 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5729 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5730
5731 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5732 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5733 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5734 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5735 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5736 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5737 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5738 Argument}.)
5739
5740 @need 1200
5741 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5742 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5743
5744 @smallexample
5745 (not (bufferp buffer))
5746 @end smallexample
5747
5748 @noindent
5749 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5750 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5751 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5752 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5753
5754 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5755 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5756 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5757 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5758 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5759 a buffer.
5760
5761 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5762 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5763 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5764 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5765 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5766 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5767 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5768 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5769
5770 @node Insert or
5771 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5772
5773 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5774 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5775 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5776 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5777 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5778 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5779
5780 @findex or
5781 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5782 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5783 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5784 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5785 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5786
5787 @need 800
5788 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5789
5790 @smallexample
5791 @group
5792 (or (bufferp buffer)
5793 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5794 @end group
5795 @end smallexample
5796
5797 @noindent
5798 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5799 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5800 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5801 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5802 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5803 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5804 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5805
5806 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5807 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5808 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5809 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5810 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5811 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5812 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5813
5814 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5815 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5816 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5817 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5818 buffer.
5819
5820 @need 1250
5821 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5822 written like this:
5823
5824 @smallexample
5825 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5826 @end smallexample
5827
5828 @node Insert let
5829 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5830
5831 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5832 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5833 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5834 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5835 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5836 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5837 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5838
5839 @need 1200
5840 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5841 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5842 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5843
5844 @smallexample
5845 @group
5846 (save-excursion
5847 (set-buffer buffer)
5848 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5849 @end group
5850 @end smallexample
5851
5852 @noindent
5853 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
5854 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
5855 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
5856 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
5857 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
5858 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
5859 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
5860 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
5861 fourth.
5862
5863 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
5864 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
5865 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
5866 buffer from which the text will be copied.
5867
5868 @need 1250
5869 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
5870
5871 @smallexample
5872 @group
5873 (save-excursion
5874 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
5875 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
5876 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5877 (setq newmark (point)))
5878 @end group
5879 @end smallexample
5880
5881 @noindent
5882 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
5883 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
5884 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
5885 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
5886 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
5887 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
5888 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
5889
5890 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
5891 and mark are relocated to their original places.
5892
5893 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
5894 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
5895 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
5896 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
5897 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
5898 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
5899 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
5900 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
5901 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
5902 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
5903
5904 @need 1250
5905 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
5906
5907 @smallexample
5908 @group
5909 (let (start end newmark)
5910 (save-excursion
5911 (save-excursion
5912 (set-buffer buffer)
5913 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5914 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5915 (setq newmark (point)))
5916 (push-mark newmark))
5917 @end group
5918 @end smallexample
5919
5920 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
5921 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
5922 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
5923 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
5924 find and use again and again.
5925
5926 @node New insert-buffer
5927 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
5928 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
5929 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
5930
5931 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
5932
5933 @need 1250
5934 It consists of two expressions,
5935
5936 @smallexample
5937 @group
5938 (push-mark
5939 (save-excursion
5940 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
5941 (point)))
5942
5943 nil
5944 @end group
5945 @end smallexample
5946
5947 @noindent
5948 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
5949 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
5950
5951 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
5952 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
5953 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
5954 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
5955 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
5956 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
5957
5958 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
5959 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
5960 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
5961 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
5962 return any value.
5963
5964 @node beginning-of-buffer
5965 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
5966 @findex beginning-of-buffer
5967
5968 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
5969 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
5970 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
5971 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
5972
5973 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
5974 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
5975 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
5976 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
5977 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
5978 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
5979 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
5980 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
5981 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
5982 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
5983 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
5984 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
5985 moves to the end of the buffer.
5986
5987 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
5988 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
5989
5990 @menu
5991 * Optional Arguments::
5992 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
5993 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
5994 @end menu
5995
5996 @node Optional Arguments
5997 @subsection Optional Arguments
5998
5999 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6000 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6001 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6002 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6003
6004 @cindex Optional arguments
6005 @cindex Keyword
6006 @findex optional
6007 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6008 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6009 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6010 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6011 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6012 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6013
6014 @need 1200
6015 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6016 therefore looks like this:
6017
6018 @smallexample
6019 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6020 @end smallexample
6021
6022 @need 1250
6023 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6024
6025 @smallexample
6026 @group
6027 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6028 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6029 (interactive "P")
6030 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6031 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6032 (push-mark))
6033 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6034 (goto-char
6035 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6036 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6037 @var{else-go-to}
6038 (point-min))))
6039 @var{do-nicety}
6040 @end group
6041 @end smallexample
6042
6043 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6044 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6045 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6046 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6047 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6048
6049 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6050 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6051 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6052 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6053 Manual}.)
6054
6055 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6056 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6057 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6058 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6059 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6060 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6061 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6062
6063 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6064 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6065 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6066 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6067 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6068 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6069 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6070 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6071 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6072 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6073 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6074 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6075 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6076 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6077 simplified form.
6078
6079 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6080 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6081
6082 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6083 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6084 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6085 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6086 like this:
6087
6088 @smallexample
6089 @group
6090 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6091 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6092 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6093 (/ size 10))
6094 (/
6095 (+ 10
6096 (*
6097 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6098 @end group
6099 @end smallexample
6100
6101 @menu
6102 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6103 * Large buffer case::
6104 * Small buffer case::
6105 @end menu
6106
6107 @ifnottex
6108 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer
6109 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6110 @end ifnottex
6111
6112 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6113 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6114 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6115 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6116
6117 @smallexample
6118 @group
6119 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6120 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6121 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6122 @end group
6123 @end smallexample
6124
6125 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6126 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6127 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6128 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6129 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6130 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6131 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6132 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6133 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6134
6135 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6136
6137 @node Large buffer case
6138 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6139
6140 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6141 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6142 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6143 that comes from the let expression.
6144
6145 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6146 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6147 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6148 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6149 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6150 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6151
6152 @need 800
6153 The line looks like this:
6154
6155 @smallexample
6156 (if (> size 10000)
6157 @end smallexample
6158
6159 @need 1200
6160 @noindent
6161 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6162 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6163
6164 @smallexample
6165 @group
6166 (*
6167 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6168 (/ size 10))
6169 @end group
6170 @end smallexample
6171
6172 @noindent
6173 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6174 @code{*}.
6175
6176 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6177 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6178 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6179 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6180 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6181 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6182
6183 @findex / @r{(division)}
6184 @cindex Division
6185 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6186 the numeric value by ten---the numeric value of the size of the
6187 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6188 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6189 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6190 multiplication.)
6191
6192 @need 1200
6193 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6194 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6195
6196 @smallexample
6197 @group
6198 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6199 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6200 @end group
6201 @end smallexample
6202
6203 @noindent
6204 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6205 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6206
6207 @need 1200
6208 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6209 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6210
6211 @smallexample
6212 @group
6213 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6214 (/ size 10)))
6215 @end group
6216 @end smallexample
6217
6218 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6219
6220 @node Small buffer case
6221 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6222
6223 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6224 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6225 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6226 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6227 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6228
6229 @need 800
6230 The code looks like this:
6231
6232 @c Keep this on one line.
6233 @smallexample
6234 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6235 @end smallexample
6236
6237 @need 1200
6238 @noindent
6239 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6240 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6241 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6242 enclosing expression:
6243
6244 @smallexample
6245 @group
6246 (/
6247 (+ 10
6248 (*
6249 size
6250 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6251 10))
6252 @end group
6253 @end smallexample
6254
6255 @need 1200
6256 @noindent
6257 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6258 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6259 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6260 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6261
6262 @smallexample
6263 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6264 @end smallexample
6265
6266 @noindent
6267 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6268 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6269 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6270 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6271 position in the buffer.
6272
6273 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6274 the cursor is moved to that point.
6275
6276 @need 1500
6277 @node beginning-of-buffer complete
6278 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6279
6280 @need 1000
6281 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6282 @sp 1
6283
6284 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6285 @smallexample
6286 @group
6287 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6288 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6289 leave mark at previous position.
6290 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6291 do not set mark at previous position.
6292 With numeric arg N,
6293 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6294
6295 If the buffer is narrowed,
6296 this command uses the beginning and size
6297 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6298 @end group
6299
6300 @group
6301 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6302 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6303 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6304 (interactive "P")
6305 (or (consp arg)
6306 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6307 (push-mark))
6308 @end group
6309 @group
6310 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6311 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6312 (+ (point-min)
6313 (if (> size 10000)
6314 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6315 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6316 (/ size 10))
6317 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6318 10)))
6319 (point-min))))
6320 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6321 @end group
6322 @end smallexample
6323
6324 @ignore
6325 From before GNU Emacs 22
6326 @smallexample
6327 @group
6328 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6329 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6330 leave mark at previous position.
6331 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6332 from the true beginning.
6333 @end group
6334 @group
6335 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6336 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6337 and does not set the mark."
6338 (interactive "P")
6339 (push-mark)
6340 @end group
6341 @group
6342 (goto-char
6343 (if arg
6344 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6345 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6346 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6347 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6348 @end group
6349 @group
6350 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6351 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6352 10))
6353 (point-min)))
6354 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6355 @end group
6356 @end smallexample
6357 @end ignore
6358
6359 @noindent
6360 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6361 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6362 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6363 the function.
6364
6365 @need 800
6366 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6367
6368 @smallexample
6369 \\[universal-argument]
6370 @end smallexample
6371
6372 @noindent
6373 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6374 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6375 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6376 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6377 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6378 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6379 information.)
6380
6381 @need 1200
6382 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6383 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6384 invoked with an argument:
6385
6386 @smallexample
6387 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6388 @end smallexample
6389
6390 @noindent
6391 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6392 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6393 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6394 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6395 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6396 to draw complaints.
6397
6398 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6399 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6400 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6401 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6402 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6403 happening.
6404
6405 @node Second Buffer Related Review
6406 @section Review
6407
6408 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6409
6410 @table @code
6411 @item or
6412 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6413 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6414 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6415 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6416 others are true.
6417
6418 @item and
6419 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6420 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6421 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6422 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6423 true.
6424
6425 @item &optional
6426 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6427 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6428 argument, if desired.
6429
6430 @item prefix-numeric-value
6431 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6432 "P")} to a numeric value.
6433
6434 @item forward-line
6435 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6436 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6437 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6438 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6439 supposed to move but couldn't.
6440
6441 @item erase-buffer
6442 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6443
6444 @item bufferp
6445 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6446 @end table
6447
6448 @node optional Exercise
6449 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6450
6451 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6452 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6453 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6454 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6455 56 as a default value.
6456
6457 @node Narrowing & Widening
6458 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6459 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6460 @cindex Narrowing
6461 @cindex Widening
6462
6463 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6464 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6465 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6466 novices.
6467
6468 @menu
6469 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6470 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6471 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6472 * narrow Exercise::
6473 @end menu
6474
6475 @ifnottex
6476 @node Narrowing advantages
6477 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6478 @end ifnottex
6479
6480 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6481 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6482 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6483 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6484 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6485 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6486 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6487 narrowing just to the region you want.
6488 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6489
6490 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6491 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6492 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6493 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6494 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6495 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6496 @code{widen} command.
6497 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6498
6499 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6500 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6501 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6502 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6503 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6504 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6505 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function
6506 uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6507 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6508 situation.
6509
6510 @node save-restriction
6511 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6512 @findex save-restriction
6513
6514 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6515 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6516 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6517 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6518 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6519 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6520 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6521 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6522 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6523 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6524 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6525 function.
6526
6527 @need 1250
6528 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6529
6530 @smallexample
6531 @group
6532 (save-restriction
6533 @var{body}@dots{} )
6534 @end group
6535 @end smallexample
6536
6537 @noindent
6538 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6539 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6540
6541 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6542 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6543 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6544 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6545 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6546 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6547 like this:
6548
6549 @smallexample
6550 @group
6551 (save-excursion
6552 (save-restriction
6553 @var{body}@dots{}))
6554 @end group
6555 @end smallexample
6556
6557 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6558 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6559 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6560
6561 @need 1250
6562 For example,
6563
6564 @smallexample
6565 @group
6566 (save-restriction
6567 (widen)
6568 (save-excursion
6569 @var{body}@dots{}))
6570 @end group
6571 @end smallexample
6572
6573 @ignore
6574 Emacs 22
6575 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6576
6577 (defun what-line ()
6578 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6579 (interactive)
6580 (let ((start (point-min))
6581 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6582 (if (= start 1)
6583 (message "Line %d" n)
6584 (save-excursion
6585 (save-restriction
6586 (widen)
6587 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6588 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6589
6590 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6591 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6592 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6593 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6594 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6595 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6596 (save-excursion
6597 (goto-char (point-min))
6598 (setq start (point))
6599 (goto-char opoint)
6600 (forward-line 0)
6601 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6602
6603 (defun count-lines (start end)
6604 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6605 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6606 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6607 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6608 (save-excursion
6609 (save-restriction
6610 (narrow-to-region start end)
6611 (goto-char (point-min))
6612 (if (eq selective-display t)
6613 (save-match-data
6614 (let ((done 0))
6615 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6616 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6617 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6618 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6619 (goto-char (point-max))
6620 (if (and (/= start end)
6621 (not (bolp)))
6622 (1+ done)
6623 done)))
6624 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6625 @end ignore
6626
6627 @node what-line
6628 @section @code{what-line}
6629 @findex what-line
6630 @cindex Widening, example of
6631
6632 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6633 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6634 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6635 original text of the function:
6636
6637 @smallexample
6638 @group
6639 (defun what-line ()
6640 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6641 (interactive)
6642 (save-restriction
6643 (widen)
6644 (save-excursion
6645 (beginning-of-line)
6646 (message "Line %d"
6647 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6648 @end group
6649 @end smallexample
6650
6651 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6652 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6653 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6654 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6655 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6656 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6657 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6658 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6659
6660 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6661 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6662 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6663 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6664
6665 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6666 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6667 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6668
6669 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6670 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6671 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6672
6673 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6674 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6675 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6676 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6677 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6678 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6679 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6680 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6681 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6682
6683 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6684 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6685 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6686 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6687
6688 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6689 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6690 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6691 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6692
6693 @need 1200
6694 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6695 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6696 echo area.
6697
6698 @smallexample
6699 @group
6700 (message "Line %d"
6701 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6702 @end group
6703 @end smallexample
6704
6705 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6706 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6707 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6708 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6709 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6710 @samp{Line 243}.
6711
6712 @need 1200
6713 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6714 last line of the function:
6715
6716 @smallexample
6717 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6718 @end smallexample
6719
6720 @ignore
6721 GNU Emacs 22
6722
6723 (defun count-lines (start end)
6724 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6725 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6726 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6727 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6728 (save-excursion
6729 (save-restriction
6730 (narrow-to-region start end)
6731 (goto-char (point-min))
6732 (if (eq selective-display t)
6733 (save-match-data
6734 (let ((done 0))
6735 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6736 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6737 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6738 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6739 (goto-char (point-max))
6740 (if (and (/= start end)
6741 (not (bolp)))
6742 (1+ done)
6743 done)))
6744 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6745 @end ignore
6746
6747 @noindent
6748 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6749 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6750 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6751 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6752 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6753 current line.
6754
6755 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6756 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6757 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6758 the original narrowing, if any.
6759
6760 @node narrow Exercise
6761 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6762
6763 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6764 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6765 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6766 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6767 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6768 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6769 @code{buffer-substring}.
6770
6771 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6772 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6773 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6774 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6775 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6776 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6777 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6778 Manual}.)
6779
6780 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6781 Or can you write the function without them?
6782
6783 @node car cdr & cons
6784 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6785 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6786 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6787
6788 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6789 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6790 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6791
6792 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6793 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6794 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6795
6796 @menu
6797 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6798 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6799 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6800 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6801 * nth::
6802 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6803 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6804 * cons Exercise::
6805 @end menu
6806
6807 @ifnottex
6808 @node Strange Names
6809 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6810 @end ifnottex
6811
6812 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6813 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6814 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6815 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6816 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6817 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
6818 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6819 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6820 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6821 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6822 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6823 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6824 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6825 introduction.
6826
6827 @node car & cdr
6828 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6829
6830 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6831 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6832 @code{rose}.
6833
6834 @need 1200
6835 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
6836 evaluating the following:
6837
6838 @smallexample
6839 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6840 @end smallexample
6841
6842 @noindent
6843 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
6844 area.
6845
6846 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
6847 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
6848
6849 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
6850 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
6851 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
6852 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
6853
6854 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
6855 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
6856 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
6857 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
6858 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
6859 buttercup)}.
6860
6861 @need 800
6862 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
6863
6864 @smallexample
6865 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6866 @end smallexample
6867
6868 @noindent
6869 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
6870 the echo area.
6871
6872 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
6873 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
6874 elements are.
6875
6876 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
6877 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
6878 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
6879
6880 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
6881
6882 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
6883 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
6884 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
6885 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
6886 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
6887 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
6888 after you will be grateful to you.)
6889
6890 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
6891 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
6892 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
6893 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
6894 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
6895 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
6896 the usual way:
6897
6898 @smallexample
6899 @group
6900 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
6901
6902 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
6903 @end group
6904 @end smallexample
6905
6906 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
6907 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
6908 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
6909 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
6910
6911 @smallexample
6912 @group
6913 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
6914 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6915 (whale dolphin seal)))
6916 @end group
6917 @end smallexample
6918
6919 @noindent
6920 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
6921 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
6922 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
6923
6924 @smallexample
6925 @group
6926 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
6927 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6928 (whale dolphin seal)))
6929 @end group
6930 @end smallexample
6931
6932 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
6933 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
6934 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
6935
6936 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
6937 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
6938 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
6939 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
6940 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
6941 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
6942 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
6943 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
6944 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
6945 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
6946 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
6947 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
6948
6949 @node cons
6950 @section @code{cons}
6951 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
6952
6953 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
6954 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
6955 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
6956
6957 @smallexample
6958 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
6959 @end smallexample
6960
6961 @need 800
6962 @noindent
6963 After evaluating this list, you will see
6964
6965 @smallexample
6966 (pine fir oak maple)
6967 @end smallexample
6968
6969 @noindent
6970 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
6971 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
6972 list.
6973
6974 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
6975 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
6976 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
6977 existing list, but creates a new one.
6978
6979 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
6980
6981 @menu
6982 * Build a list::
6983 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
6984 @end menu
6985
6986 @ifnottex
6987 @node Build a list
6988 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
6989 @end ifnottex
6990
6991 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
6992 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
6993 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
6994 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
6995 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
6996 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
6997 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
6998 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
6999 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7000 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7001
7002 @smallexample
7003 @group
7004 (cons 'buttercup ())
7005 @result{} (buttercup)
7006 @end group
7007
7008 @group
7009 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7010 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7011 @end group
7012
7013 @group
7014 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7015 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7016 @end group
7017
7018 @group
7019 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7020 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7021 @end group
7022 @end smallexample
7023
7024 @noindent
7025 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7026 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7027 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7028 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7029 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7030 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7031
7032 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7033 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7034 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7035 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7036
7037 @node length
7038 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7039 @findex length
7040
7041 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7042 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7043
7044 @smallexample
7045 @group
7046 (length '(buttercup))
7047 @result{} 1
7048 @end group
7049
7050 @group
7051 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7052 @result{} 2
7053 @end group
7054
7055 @group
7056 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7057 @result{} 3
7058 @end group
7059 @end smallexample
7060
7061 @noindent
7062 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7063 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7064 its argument.
7065
7066 @need 1200
7067 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7068 empty list:
7069
7070 @smallexample
7071 @group
7072 (length ())
7073 @result{} 0
7074 @end group
7075 @end smallexample
7076
7077 @noindent
7078 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7079
7080 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7081 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7082 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7083
7084 @smallexample
7085 (length )
7086 @end smallexample
7087
7088 @need 800
7089 @noindent
7090 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7091
7092 @smallexample
7093 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7094 @end smallexample
7095
7096 @noindent
7097 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7098 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7099 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7100 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7101 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7102
7103 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7104 the function.
7105
7106 @ignore
7107 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7108
7109 In an earlier version:
7110 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7111 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7112 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7113 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7114 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7115 about subroutines.
7116 @end ignore
7117
7118 @node nthcdr
7119 @section @code{nthcdr}
7120 @findex nthcdr
7121
7122 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7123 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7124
7125 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7126 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7127 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7128 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7129 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7130 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7131 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7132 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7133 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7134
7135 @need 1200
7136 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7137 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7138
7139 @smallexample
7140 @group
7141 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7142 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7143 @end group
7144
7145 @group
7146 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7147 @result{} (oak maple)
7148 @end group
7149
7150 @group
7151 (cdr '(oak maple))
7152 @result{}(maple)
7153 @end group
7154
7155 @group
7156 (cdr '(maple))
7157 @result{} nil
7158 @end group
7159
7160 @group
7161 (cdr 'nil)
7162 @result{} nil
7163 @end group
7164
7165 @group
7166 (cdr ())
7167 @result{} nil
7168 @end group
7169 @end smallexample
7170
7171 @need 1200
7172 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7173 between, like this:
7174
7175 @smallexample
7176 @group
7177 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7178 @result{} (oak maple)
7179 @end group
7180 @end smallexample
7181
7182 @noindent
7183 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7184 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7185 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7186 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7187 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7188 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7189 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7190 first two elements.
7191
7192 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7193 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7194 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7195 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7196 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7197
7198 @smallexample
7199 @group
7200 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7201 @result{} (oak maple)
7202 @end group
7203 @end smallexample
7204
7205 @need 1200
7206 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7207 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7208 and 5:
7209
7210 @smallexample
7211 @group
7212 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7213 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7214 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7215 @end group
7216
7217 @group
7218 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7219 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7220 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7221 @end group
7222
7223 @group
7224 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7225 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7226 @result{} (maple)
7227 @end group
7228
7229 @group
7230 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7231 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7232 @result{} nil
7233 @end group
7234
7235 @group
7236 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7237 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7238 @result{} nil
7239 @end group
7240 @end smallexample
7241
7242 @node nth
7243 @section @code{nth}
7244 @findex nth
7245
7246 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7247 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7248 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7249
7250 @need 1500
7251 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7252 @code{nth} would be:
7253
7254 @smallexample
7255 @group
7256 (defun nth (n list)
7257 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7258 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7259 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7260 @end group
7261 @end smallexample
7262
7263 @noindent
7264 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7265 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7266
7267 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7268 This can be very convenient.
7269
7270 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7271 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7272 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7273 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7274 is `one-based'.
7275
7276 @need 1250
7277 For example:
7278
7279 @smallexample
7280 @group
7281 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7282 @result{} "one"
7283
7284 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7285 @result{} "two"
7286 @end group
7287 @end smallexample
7288
7289 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7290 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7291 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7292 @code{setcdr} functions.
7293
7294 @node setcar
7295 @section @code{setcar}
7296 @findex setcar
7297
7298 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7299 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7300 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7301 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7302 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7303
7304 @need 1200
7305 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7306 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7307
7308 @smallexample
7309 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7310 @end smallexample
7311
7312 @noindent
7313 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7314 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7315 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7316 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7317 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7318 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7319 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7320 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7321 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7322 parenthesis.)
7323
7324 @need 1200
7325 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7326 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7327
7328 @smallexample
7329 @group
7330 animals
7331 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7332 @end group
7333 @end smallexample
7334
7335 @noindent
7336 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7337 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7338
7339 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7340 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7341 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7342 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7343 usual fashion:
7344
7345 @smallexample
7346 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7347 @end smallexample
7348
7349 @need 1200
7350 @noindent
7351 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7352 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7353
7354 @smallexample
7355 @group
7356 animals
7357 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7358 @end group
7359 @end smallexample
7360
7361 @noindent
7362 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7363 @code{hippopotamus}.
7364
7365 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7366 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7367 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7368
7369 @node setcdr
7370 @section @code{setcdr}
7371 @findex setcdr
7372
7373 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7374 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7375 a list rather than the first element.
7376
7377 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7378 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7379 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7380
7381 @need 1200
7382 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7383 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7384
7385 @smallexample
7386 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7387 @end smallexample
7388
7389 @need 1200
7390 @noindent
7391 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7392 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7393
7394 @smallexample
7395 @group
7396 domesticated-animals
7397 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7398 @end group
7399 @end smallexample
7400
7401 @need 1200
7402 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7403 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7404 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7405
7406 @smallexample
7407 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7408 @end smallexample
7409
7410 @noindent
7411 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7412 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7413 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7414 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7415
7416 @smallexample
7417 @group
7418 domesticated-animals
7419 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7420 @end group
7421 @end smallexample
7422
7423 @noindent
7424 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7425 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7426 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7427
7428 @node cons Exercise
7429 @section Exercise
7430
7431 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7432 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7433 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7434 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7435
7436 @node Cutting & Storing Text
7437 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7438 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7439 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7440 @cindex Killing text
7441 @cindex Clipping text
7442 @cindex Erasing text
7443 @cindex Deleting text
7444
7445 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7446 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7447 `yank' command.
7448
7449 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7450 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7451 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7452 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7453 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7454 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7455 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7456
7457 @menu
7458 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7459 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7460 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7461 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7462 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7463 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7464 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7465 * search Exercises::
7466 @end menu
7467
7468 @ifnottex
7469 @node Storing Text
7470 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7471 @end ifnottex
7472
7473 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7474 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7475 look like this:
7476
7477 @smallexample
7478 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7479 @end smallexample
7480
7481 @need 1200
7482 @noindent
7483 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7484 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7485 this:
7486
7487 @smallexample
7488 @group
7489 (cons "another piece"
7490 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7491 @end group
7492 @end smallexample
7493
7494 @need 1200
7495 @noindent
7496 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7497 the echo area:
7498
7499 @smallexample
7500 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7501 @end smallexample
7502
7503 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7504 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7505 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7506 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7507 second element of the original list:
7508
7509 @smallexample
7510 @group
7511 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7512 "a piece of text"
7513 "previous piece")))
7514 @result{} "a piece of text"
7515 @end group
7516 @end smallexample
7517
7518 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7519 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7520 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7521 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7522 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7523 than nothing at all.
7524
7525 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7526 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7527 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7528 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7529 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7530 climb the foothills.
7531
7532 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7533 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7534
7535 @node zap-to-char
7536 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7537 @findex zap-to-char
7538
7539 @c FIXME remove obsolete stuff
7540 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7541 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7542 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7543 rewrite.
7544
7545 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7546 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7547
7548 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7549 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7550 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7551
7552 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7553
7554 @menu
7555 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7556 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7557 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7558 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7559 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7560 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7561 @end menu
7562
7563 @ifnottex
7564 @node Complete zap-to-char
7565 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7566 @end ifnottex
7567
7568 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7569 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7570 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7571 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7572 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7573 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7574 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7575 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7576 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7577 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7578
7579 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7580 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7581 any text.
7582
7583 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7584 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7585 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7586 deletion command.
7587
7588 @ignore
7589 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7590 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7591 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7592 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7593 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7594 (kill-region (point)
7595 (progn
7596 (search-forward
7597 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7598 (point))))
7599 @end ignore
7600
7601 @need 1250
7602 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7603
7604 @c GNU Emacs 22
7605 @smallexample
7606 @group
7607 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7608 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7609 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7610 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7611 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7612 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7613 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7614 (kill-region (point) (progn
7615 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7616 nil nil arg)
7617 (point))))
7618 @end group
7619 @end smallexample
7620
7621 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7622 of the word `kill'.
7623
7624 @node zap-to-char interactive
7625 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7626
7627 @need 800
7628 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7629 this:
7630
7631 @smallexample
7632 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7633 @end smallexample
7634
7635 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7636 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7637 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7638 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7639 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7640 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7641 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7642 this argument.
7643
7644 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7645 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7646 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7647 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7648 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7649 make it look good).
7650
7651 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7652 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7653
7654 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7655 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7656 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7657 beep or blink at you.
7658
7659 @node zap-to-char body
7660 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7661
7662 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7663 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7664 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7665
7666 The first part of the code looks like this:
7667
7668 @smallexample
7669 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7670 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7671 (kill-region (point) (progn
7672 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7673 (point)))
7674 @end smallexample
7675
7676 @noindent
7677 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7678 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7679 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7680 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7681 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7682 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7683 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7684 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7685
7686 @noindent
7687 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7688
7689 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7690 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7691 @code{point}.
7692
7693 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7694 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7695 then at @code{progn}.
7696
7697 @node search-forward
7698 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7699 @findex search-forward
7700
7701 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7702 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7703 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7704 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7705 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7706 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7707 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7708 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7709 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7710 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7711
7712 @need 1250
7713 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7714
7715 @smallexample
7716 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7717 @end smallexample
7718
7719 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7720
7721 @enumerate
7722 @item
7723 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7724 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7725
7726 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7727 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7728 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7729 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7730 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7731 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7732 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7733 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7734 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7735 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7736 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7737 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7738
7739 @item
7740 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7741 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7742 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7743
7744 @item
7745 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7746 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7747 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7748 signal an error when the search fails.
7749
7750 @item
7751 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7752 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7753 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7754 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7755 backwards.
7756 @end enumerate
7757
7758 @need 800
7759 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7760
7761 @smallexample
7762 @group
7763 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7764 @var{limit-of-search}
7765 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7766 @var{repeat-count})
7767 @end group
7768 @end smallexample
7769
7770 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7771
7772 @node progn
7773 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7774 @findex progn
7775
7776 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7777 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7778 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7779 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7780
7781 @need 800
7782 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7783
7784 @smallexample
7785 @group
7786 (progn
7787 @var{body}@dots{})
7788 @end group
7789 @end smallexample
7790
7791 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7792 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7793 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7794
7795 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7796 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7797 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7798 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7799 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7800 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7801
7802 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7803 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7804 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7805 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7806 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7807 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7808 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7809 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7810 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7811
7812 @node Summing up zap-to-char
7813 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7814
7815 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7816 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7817
7818 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7819 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7820 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
7821 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
7822 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
7823 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
7824 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
7825
7826 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
7827 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
7828 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
7829 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
7830 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
7831 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
7832
7833 @node kill-region
7834 @section @code{kill-region}
7835 @findex kill-region
7836
7837 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
7838 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
7839 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
7840
7841 @ignore
7842 GNU Emacs 22:
7843
7844 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
7845 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7846 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7847 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
7848 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
7849
7850 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
7851 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
7852
7853 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
7854 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
7855 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
7856
7857 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
7858 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
7859 to be killed.
7860 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
7861 If the previous command was also a kill command,
7862 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
7863 to make one entry in the kill ring.
7864
7865 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
7866 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
7867 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
7868 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
7869 ;; when calling kill-append.
7870 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7871 (unless (and beg end)
7872 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7873 (condition-case nil
7874 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7875 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7876 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7877 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7878 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7879 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7880 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7881 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7882 nil)
7883 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
7884 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
7885 ;; in the region, are read-only.
7886 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
7887 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
7888 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
7889 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
7890 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
7891 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
7892 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
7893 (if kill-read-only-ok
7894 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
7895 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
7896 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
7897 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
7898 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
7899 @end ignore
7900
7901 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
7902 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
7903 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
7904
7905 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
7906 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
7907 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
7908 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
7909 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
7910
7911 @menu
7912 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
7913 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
7914 * Lisp macro::
7915 @end menu
7916
7917 @ifnottex
7918 @node Complete kill-region
7919 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
7920 @end ifnottex
7921
7922 @need 1200
7923 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
7924 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
7925 added:
7926
7927 @c GNU Emacs 22:
7928 @smallexample
7929 @group
7930 (defun kill-region (beg end)
7931 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7932 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7933 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
7934 @end group
7935
7936 @group
7937 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
7938 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7939 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
7940 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
7941 (unless (and beg end)
7942 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7943 @end group
7944
7945 @group
7946 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
7947 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
7948 ;; information about the error signal is not
7949 ;; stored for use by another function.
7950 (condition-case nil
7951 @end group
7952
7953 @group
7954 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
7955 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
7956 @end group
7957
7958 @group
7959 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
7960 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
7961 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
7962 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
7963 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
7964 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
7965 ;; `kill-new', is called.
7966 @end group
7967
7968 @group
7969 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
7970 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
7971 ;; item in the kill ring.
7972 @end group
7973
7974 @group
7975 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
7976 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
7977 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
7978 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
7979 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
7980 ;; be `kill-region'.
7981 @end group
7982 @group
7983 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7984 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7985 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7986 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7987 @end group
7988 @group
7989 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
7990 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
7991 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
7992 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
7993 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7994 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7995 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7996 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7997 nil)
7998 @end group
7999
8000 @group
8001 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8002 ;; what to do with an error.
8003 @end group
8004 @group
8005 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8006 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8007 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8008 ;; then the body is executed.
8009 @end group
8010 @group
8011 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8012 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8013 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8014 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8015 @end group
8016 @group
8017 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8018 ;; it will be set in an error
8019 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8020 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8021 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8022 ;; don't if you may not.
8023 @end group
8024 @group
8025 (if kill-read-only-ok
8026 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8027 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8028 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8029 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8030 @end group
8031 @end smallexample
8032
8033 @ignore
8034 @c v 21
8035 @smallexample
8036 @group
8037 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8038 "Kill between point and mark.
8039 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8040 (interactive "r")
8041 @end group
8042
8043 @group
8044 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8045 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8046 ;; information about the error signal is not
8047 ;; stored for use by another function.
8048 (condition-case nil
8049 @end group
8050
8051 @group
8052 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8053 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8054 @end group
8055
8056 @group
8057 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8058 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8059 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8060 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8061 @end group
8062
8063 @group
8064 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8065 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8066 ;; previous command.
8067 @end group
8068 @group
8069 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8070 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8071 (when string
8072 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8073 ;; if true, prepend string
8074 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8075 (kill-new string)))
8076 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8077 @end group
8078
8079 @group
8080 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8081 ;; what to do with an error.
8082 @end group
8083 @group
8084 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8085 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8086 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8087 ;; then the body is executed.
8088 @end group
8089 @group
8090 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8091 ;; then...
8092 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8093 @end group
8094 @group
8095 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8096 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8097 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8098 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8099 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8100 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8101 @end group
8102 @end smallexample
8103 @end ignore
8104
8105 @node condition-case
8106 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8107 @findex condition-case
8108
8109 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8110 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8111 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8112 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8113 shows you a message.
8114
8115 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8116 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8117 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8118 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8119 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8120 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8121 special form.
8122
8123 @need 800
8124 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8125
8126 @smallexample
8127 @group
8128 (condition-case
8129 @var{var}
8130 @var{bodyform}
8131 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8132 @end group
8133 @end smallexample
8134
8135 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8136 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8137 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8138 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8139
8140 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8141 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8142 correctly.
8143
8144 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8145 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8146 names.
8147
8148 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8149 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8150 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8151 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8152 part of the error handler is run.
8153
8154 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8155 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8156
8157 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8158 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8159 handler is run.
8160
8161 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8162 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8163 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8164 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8165 discarded.
8166
8167 @need 1200
8168 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8169 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8170
8171 @smallexample
8172 @group
8173 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8174 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8175 @end group
8176 @end smallexample
8177
8178 @ignore
8179 2006 Oct 24
8180 In Emacs 22,
8181 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8182 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8183 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8184 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8185
8186 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8187 this is line 8054
8188 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8189 @end ignore
8190
8191 @node Lisp macro
8192 @subsection Lisp macro
8193 @cindex Macro, lisp
8194 @cindex Lisp macro
8195
8196 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8197 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8198 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8199 text that exists.
8200
8201 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8202 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8203 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8204 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8205
8206 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp macro
8207 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8208 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8209 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8210 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8211
8212 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8213 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8214 an @code{if} without a then clause
8215
8216 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8217 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8218 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8219
8220 @ignore
8221 We will briefly look at C macros in
8222 @ref{Digression into C}.
8223 @end ignore
8224
8225 @need 1200
8226 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8227 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8228 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8229 and an else-part.
8230
8231 @smallexample
8232 @group
8233 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8234 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8235 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8236 @end group
8237 @end smallexample
8238
8239 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8240 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8241
8242 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8243 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8244 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8245
8246 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8247 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8248 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8249
8250 @need 1200
8251 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8252 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8253
8254 @smallexample
8255 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8256 @end smallexample
8257
8258 @noindent
8259 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8260 clipped text in the kill ring.
8261
8262 @node copy-region-as-kill
8263 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8264 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8265 @findex nthcdr
8266
8267 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8268 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8269 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8270
8271 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8272 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8273 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8274 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8275 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8276 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8277
8278 @menu
8279 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8280 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8281 @end menu
8282
8283 @ifnottex
8284 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill
8285 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8286 @end ifnottex
8287
8288 @need 1200
8289 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8290 function:
8291
8292 @smallexample
8293 @group
8294 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8295 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8296 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8297 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8298 system cut and paste."
8299 (interactive "r")
8300 @end group
8301 @group
8302 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8303 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8304 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8305 @end group
8306 @group
8307 (if transient-mark-mode
8308 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8309 nil)
8310 @end group
8311 @end smallexample
8312
8313 @need 800
8314 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8315
8316 @smallexample
8317 @group
8318 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8319 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8320 (interactive "r")
8321 @var{body}@dots{})
8322 @end group
8323 @end smallexample
8324
8325 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8326 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8327 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8328 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8329 almost becoming routine.
8330
8331 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8332 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8333 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8334 side-effects.
8335
8336 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8337 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8338 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8339 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8340 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8341 highlighted.)
8342
8343 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8344 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8345 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8346 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8347 ring.
8348
8349 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8350 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8351 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8352 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8353 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8354 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8355 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8356
8357 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8358 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8359
8360 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8361
8362 @node copy-region-as-kill body
8363 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8364
8365 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8366 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8367 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8368 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8369 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8370 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8371 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8372 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8373 order.
8374
8375 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8376 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8377 previous Emacs command.
8378
8379 @menu
8380 * last-command & this-command::
8381 * kill-append function::
8382 * kill-new function::
8383 @end menu
8384
8385 @ifnottex
8386 @node last-command & this-command
8387 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8388 @end ifnottex
8389
8390 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8391 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8392 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8393 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8394 @code{this-command}.
8395
8396 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8397 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8398 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8399 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8400 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8401 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8402 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8403 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8404 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8405 function.
8406
8407 @need 1250
8408 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8409
8410 @smallexample
8411 @group
8412 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8413 ;; @r{then-part}
8414 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8415 ;; @r{else-part}
8416 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8417 @end group
8418 @end smallexample
8419
8420 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8421 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8422 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8423 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8424 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8425 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8426 properties were implemented.)
8427
8428 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8429 @noindent
8430 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8431 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8432 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8433 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8434 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8435 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8436 expressions are the same.
8437
8438 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8439 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8440
8441 @node kill-append function
8442 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8443 @findex kill-append
8444
8445 @need 800
8446 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8447
8448 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8449 @smallexample
8450 @group
8451 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8452 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8453 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8454 @dots{} "
8455 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8456 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8457 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8458 (equal yank-handler
8459 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8460 yank-handler)))
8461 @end group
8462 @end smallexample
8463
8464 @ignore
8465 was:
8466 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8467 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8468 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8469 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8470 it."
8471 (kill-new (if before-p
8472 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8473 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8474 t))
8475 @end ignore
8476
8477 @noindent
8478 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8479 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8480 a moment.
8481
8482 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8483 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8484 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8485 `italics'.)
8486
8487 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8488 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8489 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8490 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8491 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8492
8493 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8494 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8495 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8496 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8497
8498 @smallexample
8499 @group
8500 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8501 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8502 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8503 @end group
8504 @end smallexample
8505
8506 @noindent
8507 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8508 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8509 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8510 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8511 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8512 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8513 previously saved text.
8514
8515 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8516 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8517 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8518 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8519 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8520 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8521 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8522 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8523 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8524 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8525 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8526 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8527 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8528 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8529
8530 @need 800
8531 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8532 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8533
8534 @smallexample
8535 (concat string cur)
8536 @end smallexample
8537
8538 @need 1200
8539 @noindent
8540 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8541 after the old text:
8542
8543 @smallexample
8544 (concat cur string))
8545 @end smallexample
8546
8547 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8548 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8549 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8550
8551 @smallexample
8552 @group
8553 (concat "abc" "def")
8554 @result{} "abcdef"
8555 @end group
8556
8557 @group
8558 (concat "new "
8559 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8560 @result{} "new first element"
8561
8562 (concat (car
8563 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8564 @result{} "first element modified"
8565 @end group
8566 @end smallexample
8567
8568 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8569 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8570 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8571 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8572
8573 @node kill-new function
8574 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8575 @findex kill-new
8576
8577 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8578 @ignore
8579 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8580 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8581 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8582 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8583
8584 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8585 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8586 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8587 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8588 @end ignore
8589 @need 1200
8590 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8591
8592 @smallexample
8593 @group
8594 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8595 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8596 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8597
8598 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8599 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8600 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8601 @dots{}"
8602 @end group
8603 @group
8604 (if (> (length string) 0)
8605 (if yank-handler
8606 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8607 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8608 (if yank-handler
8609 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8610 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8611 @end group
8612 @group
8613 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8614 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8615 @end group
8616 @group
8617 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8618 (setcar kill-ring string)
8619 (push string kill-ring)
8620 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8621 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8622 @end group
8623 @group
8624 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8625 (if interprogram-cut-function
8626 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8627 @end group
8628 @end smallexample
8629 @ignore
8630 was:
8631 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8632 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8633 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8634 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8635 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8636 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8637 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8638 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8639 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8640 (setcar kill-ring string)
8641 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8642 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8643 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8644 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8645 (if interprogram-cut-function
8646 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8647 @end ignore
8648
8649 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8650
8651 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8652
8653 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8654 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8655 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8656
8657 @need 1200
8658 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8659
8660 @smallexample
8661 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8662 @end smallexample
8663
8664 @noindent
8665 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8666
8667 @noindent
8668 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8669 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8670 them below.
8671
8672 @need 1200
8673 The critical lines are these:
8674
8675 @smallexample
8676 @group
8677 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8678 ;; @r{then}
8679 (setcar kill-ring string)
8680 @end group
8681 @group
8682 ;; @r{else}
8683 (push string kill-ring)
8684 @end group
8685 @group
8686 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8687 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8688 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8689 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8690 @end group
8691 @group
8692 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8693 (if interprogram-cut-function
8694 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8695 @end group
8696 @end smallexample
8697
8698 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8699 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8700 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8701
8702 @need 1250
8703 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8704 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8705 expression is executed:
8706
8707 @smallexample
8708 (setcar kill-ring string)
8709 @end smallexample
8710
8711 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8712 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8713 first element.
8714
8715 @need 1250
8716 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8717 else-part of the condition is executed:
8718
8719 @smallexample
8720 (push string kill-ring)
8721 @end smallexample
8722
8723 @noindent
8724 @need 1250
8725 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8726 the older
8727
8728 @smallexample
8729 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8730 @end smallexample
8731
8732 @noindent
8733 @need 1250
8734 or the newer
8735
8736 @smallexample
8737 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8738 @end smallexample
8739
8740 @noindent
8741 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8742 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8743 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8744 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8745 ring from growing too long.
8746
8747 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8748
8749 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8750 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8751 kill ring.
8752
8753 We can see how this works with an example.
8754
8755 @need 800
8756 First,
8757
8758 @smallexample
8759 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8760 @end smallexample
8761
8762 @need 1200
8763 @noindent
8764 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8765 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8766
8767 @smallexample
8768 @group
8769 example-list
8770 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8771 @end group
8772 @end smallexample
8773
8774 @need 1200
8775 @noindent
8776 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8777 following expression:
8778 @findex push, @r{example}
8779
8780 @smallexample
8781 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8782 @end smallexample
8783
8784 @need 800
8785 @noindent
8786 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8787
8788 @smallexample
8789 @group
8790 example-list
8791 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8792 @end group
8793 @end smallexample
8794
8795 @noindent
8796 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8797
8798 @need 1200
8799 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8800 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8801
8802 @smallexample
8803 @group
8804 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8805 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8806 @end group
8807 @end smallexample
8808
8809 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8810 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8811 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8812 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8813 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8814 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8815
8816 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
8817 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
8818 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
8819 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
8820 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
8821 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
8822 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
8823 the last element of the kill ring.
8824
8825 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
8826 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
8827 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
8828 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
8829 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
8830
8831 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
8832 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
8833 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
8834 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
8835 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
8836 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
8837 @code{setcdr}}.)
8838
8839 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
8840 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
8841 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
8842 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
8843
8844 @smallexample
8845 @group
8846 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
8847 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
8848 @end group
8849
8850 @group
8851 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
8852 @result{} nil
8853
8854 trees
8855 @result{} (maple oak pine)
8856 @end group
8857 @end smallexample
8858
8859 @noindent
8860 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
8861 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
8862
8863 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
8864 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
8865 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
8866 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
8867 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
8868
8869 @need 800
8870 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
8871
8872 @smallexample
8873 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8874 @end smallexample
8875
8876 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
8877 the @code{kill-ring}.
8878
8879 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
8880 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
8881 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
8882
8883 @need 1200
8884 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
8885
8886 @smallexample
8887 @group
8888 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8889 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8890 @end group
8891 @end smallexample
8892
8893 @noindent
8894 It starts with an @code{if} expression
8895
8896 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
8897 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
8898 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
8899 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
8900 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
8901 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
8902 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
8903
8904 @noindent
8905 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
8906 function @code{and}.
8907
8908 @findex and
8909 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
8910 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
8911 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
8912 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
8913 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
8914 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
8915 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
8916 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
8917
8918 The expression determines whether the second argument to
8919 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
8920 @ignore
8921 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
8922 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
8923 @end ignore
8924
8925 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
8926 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
8927 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
8928 have saved and select one piece to paste.
8929
8930 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
8931 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
8932 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
8933 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
8934 the string and stores it in memory operated by X@. You can paste the
8935 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
8936
8937 @need 1200
8938 The expression looks like this:
8939
8940 @smallexample
8941 @group
8942 (if interprogram-cut-function
8943 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8944 @end group
8945 @end smallexample
8946
8947 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
8948 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
8949 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
8950 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
8951 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
8952
8953 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
8954 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
8955 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
8956
8957 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
8958 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
8959 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
8960 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
8961 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
8962 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
8963 that, we will digress into C.
8964
8965 @ignore
8966 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
8967
8968 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
8969 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
8970 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
8971 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
8972
8973 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
8974 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
8975 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
8976 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
8977 order is correct.)
8978
8979 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
8980 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
8981 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
8982 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
8983 @end ignore
8984 @ignore
8985
8986 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
8987 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
8988
8989 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
8990 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
8991
8992 2006 Oct 24
8993 In Emacs 22,
8994 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8995 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8996 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8997 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8998
8999 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9000 @end ignore
9001
9002 @node Digression into C
9003 @section Digression into C
9004 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9005 @cindex C, a digression into
9006 @cindex Digression into C
9007
9008 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9009 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9010 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9011 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9012 back.
9013
9014 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9015 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9016 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9017 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9018 describe it here.
9019
9020 @c GNU Emacs 24 in src/editfns.c
9021 @c the DEFUN for delete-and-extract-region
9022
9023 @need 1500
9024 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9025 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9026 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9027 like this:
9028
9029 @smallexample
9030 @group
9031 DEFUN ("delete-and-extract-region", Fdelete_and_extract_region,
9032 Sdelete_and_extract_region, 2, 2, 0,
9033 doc: /* Delete the text between START and END and return it. */)
9034 (Lisp_Object start, Lisp_Object end)
9035 @{
9036 validate_region (&start, &end);
9037 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9038 return empty_unibyte_string;
9039 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9040 @}
9041 @end group
9042 @end smallexample
9043
9044 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9045 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9046 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9047 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9048 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9049
9050 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9051 parentheses:
9052
9053 @itemize @bullet
9054 @item
9055 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9056 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9057
9058 @item
9059 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9060 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9061 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9062 instead.
9063
9064 @item
9065 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9066 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9067 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9068
9069 @item
9070 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9071 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9072 arguments.
9073
9074 @item
9075 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9076 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9077 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9078 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9079 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9080
9081 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9082 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9083 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9084 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9085 and provides a prompt.
9086
9087 @item
9088 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9089 function written in Emacs Lisp. This is written as a C comment. (When
9090 you build Emacs, the program @command{lib-src/make-docfile} extracts
9091 these comments and uses them to make the ``real'' documentation.)
9092 @end itemize
9093
9094 @need 1200
9095 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9096 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9097 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9098 consists of the following four lines:
9099
9100 @smallexample
9101 @group
9102 validate_region (&start, &end);
9103 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9104 return empty_unibyte_string;
9105 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9106 @end group
9107 @end smallexample
9108
9109 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9110 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9111 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9112 then return an empty string.
9113
9114 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9115 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9116 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9117 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9118 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9119
9120 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9121 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9122 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9123 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9124 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9125
9126 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9127 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9128 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9129 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9130
9131 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9132 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9133
9134 @need 800
9135 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9136
9137 @smallexample
9138 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9139 @end smallexample
9140
9141 @noindent
9142 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9143 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9144
9145 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9146 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9147 all work.
9148
9149 @node defvar
9150 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9151 @findex defvar
9152 @cindex Initializing a variable
9153 @cindex Variable initialization
9154
9155 @ignore
9156 2006 Oct 24
9157 In Emacs 22,
9158 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9159 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9160 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9161 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9162
9163 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9164
9165 @end ignore
9166
9167 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9168 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9169 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9170 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9171 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9172 form.
9173
9174 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9175 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9176 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9177
9178 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9179 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9180 name comes from ``define variable''.
9181
9182 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9183 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9184 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9185 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9186 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9187 documentation string.
9188
9189 (There is a related macro, @code{defcustom}, designed for variables
9190 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9191 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9192
9193 @menu
9194 * See variable current value::
9195 * defvar and asterisk::
9196 @end menu
9197
9198 @ifnottex
9199 @node See variable current value
9200 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9201 @end ifnottex
9202
9203 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9204 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9205 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9206 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9207 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9208 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9209 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9210 @code{kill-ring}:
9211
9212 @smallexample
9213 @group
9214 Documentation:
9215 List of killed text sequences.
9216 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9217 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9218 @end group
9219 @group
9220 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9221 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9222 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9223 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9224 ring directly.
9225 @end group
9226 @end smallexample
9227
9228 @need 800
9229 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9230
9231 @smallexample
9232 @group
9233 (defvar kill-ring nil
9234 "List of killed text sequences.
9235 @dots{}")
9236 @end group
9237 @end smallexample
9238
9239 @noindent
9240 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9241 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9242 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9243 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9244 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9245 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9246 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9247 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9248 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9249
9250 @node defvar and asterisk
9251 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9252 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9253 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9254
9255 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9256 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9257 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9258 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9259 @code{defcustom} instead, since it provides a path into
9260 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9261 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9262
9263 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9264 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9265 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9266 documentation string. For example:
9267
9268 @smallexample
9269 @group
9270 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9271 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9272 @dots{} ")
9273 @end group
9274 @end smallexample
9275
9276 @findex set-variable
9277 @noindent
9278 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9279 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9280 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9281 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9282 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9283 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9284 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9285 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9286
9287 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9288 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9289 are now more than 700 such variables, far too many to remember
9290 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9291 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9292 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9293 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9294
9295 @need 1250
9296 @node cons & search-fwd Review
9297 @section Review
9298
9299 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9300
9301 @table @code
9302 @item car
9303 @itemx cdr
9304 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9305 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9306
9307 @need 1250
9308 For example:
9309
9310 @smallexample
9311 @group
9312 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9313 @result{} 1
9314 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9315 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9316 @end group
9317 @end smallexample
9318
9319 @item cons
9320 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9321 second argument.
9322
9323 @need 1250
9324 For example:
9325
9326 @smallexample
9327 @group
9328 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9329 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9330 @end group
9331 @end smallexample
9332
9333 @item funcall
9334 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9335 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9336
9337 @item nthcdr
9338 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9339 @iftex
9340 The
9341 @tex
9342 $n^{th}$
9343 @end tex
9344 @code{cdr}.
9345 @end iftex
9346 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9347
9348 @need 1250
9349 For example:
9350
9351 @smallexample
9352 @group
9353 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9354 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9355 @end group
9356 @end smallexample
9357
9358 @item setcar
9359 @itemx setcdr
9360 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9361 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9362
9363 @need 1250
9364 For example:
9365
9366 @smallexample
9367 @group
9368 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9369
9370 (setcar triple '37)
9371
9372 triple
9373 @result{} (37 2 3)
9374
9375 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9376
9377 triple
9378 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9379 @end group
9380 @end smallexample
9381
9382 @item progn
9383 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9384 last.
9385
9386 @need 1250
9387 For example:
9388
9389 @smallexample
9390 @group
9391 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9392 @result{} 4
9393 @end group
9394 @end smallexample
9395
9396 @item save-restriction
9397 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9398 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9399
9400 @item search-forward
9401 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9402 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9403 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9404 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9405
9406 @need 1250
9407 @noindent
9408 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9409 arguments:
9410
9411 @enumerate
9412 @item
9413 The string or regular expression to search for.
9414
9415 @item
9416 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9417
9418 @item
9419 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9420 error message.
9421
9422 @item
9423 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9424 search goes backwards.
9425 @end enumerate
9426
9427 @item kill-region
9428 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9429 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9430
9431 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9432 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9433 by yanking.
9434
9435 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9436 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9437 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9438 @end table
9439
9440 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9441 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9442 (This is not an interactive command.)
9443
9444 @need 1500
9445 @node search Exercises
9446 @section Searching Exercises
9447
9448 @itemize @bullet
9449 @item
9450 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9451 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9452 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9453 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9454 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9455 @code{test-search} instead.)
9456
9457 @item
9458 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9459 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9460 print an appropriate message.
9461 @end itemize
9462
9463 @node List Implementation
9464 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9465 @cindex Lists in a computer
9466
9467 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9468 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9469 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9470 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9471 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9472 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9473 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9474 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9475 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9476 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9477
9478 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9479 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9480
9481 @menu
9482 * Lists diagrammed::
9483 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9484 * List Exercise::
9485 @end menu
9486
9487 @ifnottex
9488 @node Lists diagrammed
9489 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9490 @end ifnottex
9491
9492 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9493 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9494 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9495 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9496 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9497 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9498 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9499
9500 @need 1200
9501 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9502
9503 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9504 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9505 @ifnottex
9506 @smallexample
9507 @group
9508 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9509 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9510 | | |
9511 | | |
9512 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9513 @end group
9514 @end smallexample
9515 @end ifnottex
9516 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9517 @sp 1
9518 @tex
9519 @center @image{cons-1}
9520 @end tex
9521 @sp 1
9522 @end ifset
9523 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9524 @iftex
9525 @smallexample
9526 @group
9527 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9528 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9529 | | |
9530 | | |
9531 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9532 @end group
9533 @end smallexample
9534 @end iftex
9535 @end ifclear
9536
9537 @noindent
9538 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9539 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9540 i.e., the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9541 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9542 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9543 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9544 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9545 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9546 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9547
9548 @need 1200
9549 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9550 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9551 evaluation of the expression
9552
9553 @smallexample
9554 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9555 @end smallexample
9556
9557 @need 1250
9558 @noindent
9559 creates a situation like this:
9560
9561 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9562 @ifnottex
9563 @smallexample
9564 @group
9565 bouquet
9566 |
9567 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9568 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9569 | | |
9570 | | |
9571 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9572 @end group
9573 @end smallexample
9574 @end ifnottex
9575 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9576 @sp 1
9577 @tex
9578 @center @image{cons-2}
9579 @end tex
9580 @sp 1
9581 @end ifset
9582 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9583 @iftex
9584 @smallexample
9585 @group
9586 bouquet
9587 |
9588 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9589 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9590 | | |
9591 | | |
9592 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9593 @end group
9594 @end smallexample
9595 @end iftex
9596 @end ifclear
9597
9598 @noindent
9599 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9600 pair of boxes.
9601
9602 @need 1200
9603 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9604 like this:
9605
9606 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9607 @ifnottex
9608 @smallexample
9609 @group
9610 bouquet
9611 |
9612 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9613 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9614 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9615 | | | | | | | cup | |
9616 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9617 @end group
9618 @end smallexample
9619 @end ifnottex
9620 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9621 @sp 1
9622 @tex
9623 @center @image{cons-2a}
9624 @end tex
9625 @sp 1
9626 @end ifset
9627 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9628 @iftex
9629 @smallexample
9630 @group
9631 bouquet
9632 |
9633 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9634 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9635 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9636 | | | | | | | cup | |
9637 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9638 @end group
9639 @end smallexample
9640 @end iftex
9641 @end ifclear
9642
9643 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9644 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9645 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9646 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9647 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9648 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9649 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9650 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9651 address-boxes for the list.)
9652
9653 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9654 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9655 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9656 evaluation of the following expression
9657
9658 @smallexample
9659 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9660 @end smallexample
9661
9662 @need 800
9663 @noindent
9664 produces this:
9665
9666 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9667 @ifnottex
9668 @sp 1
9669 @smallexample
9670 @group
9671 bouquet flowers
9672 | |
9673 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9674 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9675 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9676 | | |
9677 | | |
9678 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9679 @end group
9680 @end smallexample
9681 @sp 1
9682 @end ifnottex
9683 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9684 @sp 1
9685 @tex
9686 @center @image{cons-3}
9687 @end tex
9688 @sp 1
9689 @end ifset
9690 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9691 @iftex
9692 @sp 1
9693 @smallexample
9694 @group
9695 bouquet flowers
9696 | |
9697 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9698 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9699 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9700 | | |
9701 | | |
9702 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9703 @end group
9704 @end smallexample
9705 @sp 1
9706 @end iftex
9707 @end ifclear
9708
9709 @noindent
9710 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9711 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9712 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9713 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9714
9715 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9716 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9717 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9718 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9719 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9720
9721 @need 1200
9722 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9723 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9724 the expression
9725
9726 @smallexample
9727 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9728 @end smallexample
9729
9730 @need 1500
9731 @noindent
9732 produces:
9733
9734 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9735 @ifnottex
9736 @sp 1
9737 @smallexample
9738 @group
9739 bouquet flowers
9740 | |
9741 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9742 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9743 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9744 | | | |
9745 | | | |
9746 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9747 @end group
9748 @end smallexample
9749 @sp 1
9750 @end ifnottex
9751 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9752 @sp 1
9753 @tex
9754 @center @image{cons-4}
9755 @end tex
9756 @sp 1
9757 @end ifset
9758 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9759 @iftex
9760 @sp 1
9761 @smallexample
9762 @group
9763 bouquet flowers
9764 | |
9765 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9766 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9767 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9768 | | | |
9769 | | | |
9770 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9771 @end group
9772 @end smallexample
9773 @sp 1
9774 @end iftex
9775 @end ifclear
9776
9777 @need 1200
9778 @noindent
9779 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
9780 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
9781
9782 @smallexample
9783 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
9784 @end smallexample
9785
9786 @noindent
9787 which returns @code{t} for true.
9788
9789 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
9790 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
9791 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
9792 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
9793
9794 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
9795 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
9796 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
9797 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
9798 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
9799 brilliantly simple!
9800
9801 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
9802 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
9803
9804 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
9805 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
9806
9807 @node Symbols as Chest
9808 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9809 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9810 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
9811 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
9812
9813 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
9814 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
9815 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
9816 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
9817 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
9818
9819 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
9820 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
9821 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
9822 where the buried treasure lies.
9823
9824 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
9825 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
9826 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
9827 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9828 Reference Manual}.)
9829
9830 @need 1500
9831 Here is a fanciful representation:
9832
9833 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
9834 @ifnottex
9835 @sp 1
9836 @smallexample
9837 @group
9838 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9839
9840 __ o0O0o __
9841 / \
9842 ---------------------
9843 | directions to | [map to]
9844 | symbol name | bouquet
9845 | |
9846 +---------------------+
9847 | directions to |
9848 | symbol definition | [none]
9849 | |
9850 +---------------------+
9851 | directions to | [map to]
9852 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9853 | |
9854 +---------------------+
9855 | directions to |
9856 | property list | [not described here]
9857 | |
9858 +---------------------+
9859 |/ \|
9860 @end group
9861 @end smallexample
9862 @sp 1
9863 @end ifnottex
9864 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9865 @sp 1
9866 @tex
9867 @center @image{drawers}
9868 @end tex
9869 @sp 1
9870 @end ifset
9871 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9872 @iftex
9873 @sp 1
9874 @smallexample
9875 @group
9876 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9877
9878 __ o0O0o __
9879 / \
9880 ---------------------
9881 | directions to | [map to]
9882 | symbol name | bouquet
9883 | |
9884 +---------------------+
9885 | directions to |
9886 | symbol definition | [none]
9887 | |
9888 +---------------------+
9889 | directions to | [map to]
9890 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9891 | |
9892 +---------------------+
9893 | directions to |
9894 | property list | [not described here]
9895 | |
9896 +---------------------+
9897 |/ \|
9898 @end group
9899 @end smallexample
9900 @sp 1
9901 @end iftex
9902 @end ifclear
9903
9904 @node List Exercise
9905 @section Exercise
9906
9907 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
9908 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
9909 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
9910 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
9911
9912 @node Yanking
9913 @chapter Yanking Text Back
9914 @findex yank
9915 @cindex Text retrieval
9916 @cindex Retrieving text
9917 @cindex Pasting text
9918
9919 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
9920 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
9921 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
9922 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
9923 the original buffer).
9924
9925 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
9926 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
9927 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
9928 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
9929 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
9930 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
9931 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
9932 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
9933 that holds the text is a list.
9934 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
9935 list is handled as a ring.)
9936
9937 @menu
9938 * Kill Ring Overview::
9939 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
9940 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9941 @end menu
9942
9943 @node Kill Ring Overview
9944 @section Kill Ring Overview
9945 @cindex Kill ring overview
9946
9947 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
9948
9949 @smallexample
9950 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9951 @end smallexample
9952
9953 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
9954 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
9955 buffer where my cursor is located.
9956
9957 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
9958 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
9959 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
9960
9961 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
9962 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
9963 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
9964 which is used by the two other functions.
9965
9966 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
9967 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
9968 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
9969
9970 @smallexample
9971 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
9972 @end smallexample
9973
9974 @noindent
9975 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
9976 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
9977 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
9978 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
9979 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
9980 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
9981 is easier to understand.)
9982
9983 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
9984 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9985
9986 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer
9987 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
9988
9989 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
9990 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
9991 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
9992
9993 @need 1000
9994 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
9995
9996 @smallexample
9997 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9998 @end smallexample
9999
10000 @need 1250
10001 @noindent
10002 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10003 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10004
10005 @smallexample
10006 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10007 @end smallexample
10008
10009 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10010 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10011 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10012 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10013 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10014 text. Here is a diagram:
10015
10016 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10017 @ifnottex
10018 @smallexample
10019 @group
10020 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10021 | |
10022 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10023 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10024 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10025 | | |
10026 | | |
10027 | | --> "yet more text"
10028 | |
10029 | --> "a different piece of text"
10030 |
10031 --> "some text"
10032 @end group
10033 @end smallexample
10034 @sp 1
10035 @end ifnottex
10036 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10037 @sp 1
10038 @tex
10039 @center @image{cons-5}
10040 @end tex
10041 @sp 1
10042 @end ifset
10043 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10044 @iftex
10045 @smallexample
10046 @group
10047 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10048 | |
10049 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10050 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10051 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10052 | | |
10053 | | |
10054 | | --> "yet more text"
10055 | |
10056 | --> "a different piece of text
10057 |
10058 --> "some text"
10059 @end group
10060 @end smallexample
10061 @sp 1
10062 @end iftex
10063 @end ifclear
10064
10065 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10066 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10067 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10068 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10069 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10070 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10071
10072 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10073 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10074 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10075 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10076 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10077 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10078 inserted.
10079
10080 @ignore
10081 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10082
10083 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10084
10085 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10086 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10087 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10088 (interactive "p")
10089 (current-kill arg))
10090
10091 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10092 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10093 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10094 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10095 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10096 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10097 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10098 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10099 interprogram-paste-function
10100 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10101 (if interprogram-paste
10102 (progn
10103 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10104 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10105 ;; selection, with identical text.
10106 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10107 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10108 interprogram-paste)
10109 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10110 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10111 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10112 (length kill-ring))
10113 kill-ring)))
10114 (or do-not-move
10115 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10116 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10117
10118 @end ignore
10119
10120 @need 1500
10121 @node yank nthcdr Exercises
10122 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10123
10124 @itemize @bullet
10125 @item
10126 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10127 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10128 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10129 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10130 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10131 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10132
10133 @item
10134 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10135 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10136 @end itemize
10137
10138 @node Loops & Recursion
10139 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10140 @cindex Loops and recursion
10141 @cindex Recursion and loops
10142 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10143
10144 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10145 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10146 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10147
10148 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10149 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10150 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10151 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10152 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10153 have on humans.
10154
10155 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10156 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10157 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10158 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10159 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10160 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10161 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10162 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10163 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10164 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10165 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10166
10167 @menu
10168 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10169 * dolist dotimes::
10170 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10171 * Looping exercise::
10172 @end menu
10173
10174 @node while
10175 @section @code{while}
10176 @cindex Loops
10177 @findex while
10178
10179 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10180 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10181 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10182 next, however, is different.
10183
10184 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10185 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10186 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10187 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10188 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10189 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10190 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10191 body of the expression.
10192
10193 @need 1200
10194 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10195
10196 @smallexample
10197 @group
10198 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10199 @var{body}@dots{})
10200 @end group
10201 @end smallexample
10202
10203 @menu
10204 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10205 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10206 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10207 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10208 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10209 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10210 @end menu
10211
10212 @ifnottex
10213 @node Looping with while
10214 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10215 @end ifnottex
10216
10217 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10218 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10219 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10220 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10221 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10222 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10223 expression and `exits the loop'.
10224
10225 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10226 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10227 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10228 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10229 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10230 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10231 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10232 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10233
10234 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10235 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10236 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10237 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10238 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10239 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10240 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10241 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10242 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10243 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10244 are repeatedly evaluated.
10245
10246 @node Loop Example
10247 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10248
10249 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10250 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10251 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10252 create a short example to illustrate it.
10253
10254 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10255 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10256 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10257 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10258 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10259 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10260 @code{while} loop.
10261
10262 @need 1200
10263 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10264 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10265
10266 @smallexample
10267 (setq empty-list ())
10268 @end smallexample
10269
10270 @noindent
10271 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10272 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10273 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10274 echo area:
10275
10276 @smallexample
10277 empty-list
10278 @end smallexample
10279
10280 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10281 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10282 evaluating the following two expressions:
10283
10284 @smallexample
10285 @group
10286 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10287
10288 animals
10289 @end group
10290 @end smallexample
10291
10292 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10293 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10294 written like this:
10295
10296 @smallexample
10297 @group
10298 (while animals
10299 @dots{}
10300 @end group
10301 @end smallexample
10302
10303 @noindent
10304 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10305 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10306 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10307 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10308 to be false.
10309
10310 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10311 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10312 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10313 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10314 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10315 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10316 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10317 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10318
10319 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10320 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10321 following expression:
10322
10323 @smallexample
10324 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10325 @end smallexample
10326
10327 @noindent
10328 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10329 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10330 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10331 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10332 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10333
10334 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10335 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10336 looks like this:
10337
10338 @smallexample
10339 @group
10340 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10341 @var{body}@dots{}
10342 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10343 @end group
10344 @end smallexample
10345
10346 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10347 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10348 own.
10349
10350 @node print-elements-of-list
10351 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10352 @findex print-elements-of-list
10353
10354 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10355 loop with a list.
10356
10357 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10358 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10359 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10360 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10361 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10362
10363 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10364 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10365 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10366 earlier versions.
10367
10368 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10369 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10370 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10371 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10372 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10373 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10374 (@code{yank}).
10375
10376 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10377 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10378 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10379 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10380 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10381 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10382 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10383 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10384 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10385
10386 @need 1500
10387 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10388 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10389 results.
10390
10391 @smallexample
10392 @group
10393 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10394
10395 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10396 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10397 (while list
10398 (print (car list))
10399 (setq list (cdr list))))
10400
10401 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10402 @end group
10403 @end smallexample
10404
10405 @need 1200
10406 @noindent
10407 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10408 this:
10409
10410 @smallexample
10411 @group
10412 gazelle
10413
10414 giraffe
10415
10416 lion
10417
10418 tiger
10419 nil
10420 @end group
10421 @end smallexample
10422
10423 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10424 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10425 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10426 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10427 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10428
10429 @node Incrementing Loop
10430 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10431
10432 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10433 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10434 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10435 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10436 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10437 repeats itself.
10438
10439 @ifnottex
10440 @node Incrementing Loop Details
10441 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10442 @end ifnottex
10443
10444 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10445 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10446 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10447 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10448 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10449 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10450 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10451 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10452 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10453 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10454
10455 @need 1250
10456 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10457 counter looks like this:
10458
10459 @smallexample
10460 @group
10461 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10462 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10463 @var{body}@dots{}
10464 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10465 @end group
10466 @end smallexample
10467
10468 @noindent
10469 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10470 is set to 1.
10471
10472 @menu
10473 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10474 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10475 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10476 @end menu
10477
10478 @node Incrementing Example
10479 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10480
10481 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10482 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10483 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10484
10485 @sp 1
10486 @c pebble diagram
10487 @ifnottex
10488 @smallexample
10489 @group
10490 *
10491 * *
10492 * * *
10493 * * * *
10494 @end group
10495 @end smallexample
10496 @end ifnottex
10497 @iftex
10498 @smallexample
10499 @group
10500 @bullet{}
10501 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10502 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10503 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10504 @end group
10505 @end smallexample
10506 @end iftex
10507 @sp 1
10508
10509 @noindent
10510 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10511 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10512
10513 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10514 triangle with 7 rows?
10515
10516 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10517 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10518 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10519 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10520 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10521 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10522 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10523
10524 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10525 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10526 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10527 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10528 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10529 a more complex process once.
10530
10531 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10532 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10533 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10534 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10535 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10536
10537 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10538 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10539 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10540 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10541 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10542 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10543 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10544
10545 @node Inc Example parts
10546 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10547
10548 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10549 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10550 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10551 the function.
10552
10553 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10554 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10555 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10556
10557 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10558 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10559 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10560 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10561
10562 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10563 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10564 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10565 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10566 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10567 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10568 more rows left to add.
10569
10570 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10571 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10572 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10573 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10574 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10575 statement will look like this:
10576
10577 @smallexample
10578 @group
10579 (let ((total 0)
10580 (row-number 1))
10581 @var{body}@dots{})
10582 @end group
10583 @end smallexample
10584
10585 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10586 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10587 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10588 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10589 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10590 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10591 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10592 equal to the number of rows.)
10593
10594 @need 1500
10595 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10596 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10597 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10598 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10599 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10600
10601 @smallexample
10602 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10603 @end smallexample
10604
10605 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10606 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10607 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10608 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10609 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10610 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10611 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10612
10613 @smallexample
10614 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10615 @end smallexample
10616
10617 @noindent
10618 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10619 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10620
10621 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10622 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10623 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10624 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10625 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10626 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10627 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10628 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10629 repetition of the loop.
10630
10631 @need 1200
10632 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10633 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10634
10635 @smallexample
10636 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10637 @end smallexample
10638
10639 @node Inc Example altogether
10640 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10641
10642 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10643 put them together.
10644
10645 @need 800
10646 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10647
10648 @smallexample
10649 @group
10650 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10651 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10652 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10653 @end group
10654 @end smallexample
10655
10656 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10657 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10658 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10659
10660 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10661 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10662 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10663 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10664 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10665
10666 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10667 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10668 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10669 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10670 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10671 of the @code{let}.
10672
10673 @need 1250
10674 In outline, the function will look like this:
10675
10676 @smallexample
10677 @group
10678 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10679 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10680 (let (@var{varlist})
10681 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10682 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10683 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10684 @end group
10685 @end smallexample
10686
10687 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10688 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10689 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10690 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10691 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10692 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10693 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10694 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10695 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10696 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10697
10698 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10699 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10700 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10701 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10702 the last element:
10703
10704 @smallexample
10705 @group
10706 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10707 @end group
10708 @end smallexample
10709
10710 @need 1200
10711 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10712 looks like this:
10713
10714 @smallexample
10715 @group
10716 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10717 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10718 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10719 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10720 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10721 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10722 @end group
10723 @group
10724 (let ((total 0)
10725 (row-number 1))
10726 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10727 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10728 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10729 total))
10730 @end group
10731 @end smallexample
10732
10733 @need 1200
10734 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10735 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10736
10737 @smallexample
10738 @group
10739 (triangle 4)
10740
10741 (triangle 7)
10742 @end group
10743 @end smallexample
10744
10745 @noindent
10746 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10747 numbers is 28.
10748
10749 @node Decrementing Loop
10750 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10751
10752 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10753 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10754 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10755 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10756 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10757 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
10758 repeatedly.
10759
10760 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
10761 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
10762 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
10763 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
10764 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
10765 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
10766 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
10767
10768 @need 1250
10769 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
10770
10771 @smallexample
10772 @group
10773 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10774 @var{body}@dots{}
10775 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
10776 @end group
10777 @end smallexample
10778
10779 @menu
10780 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
10781 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10782 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10783 @end menu
10784
10785 @node Decrementing Example
10786 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
10787
10788 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
10789 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
10790
10791 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
10792 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
10793 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
10794 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
10795 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
10796
10797 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
10798 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
10799 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
10800 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
10801 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
10802 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
10803 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
10804 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
10805
10806 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
10807 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
10808 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
10809 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
10810 the row.
10811
10812 @node Dec Example parts
10813 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10814
10815 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
10816 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
10817 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
10818 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
10819 @code{total}, respectively.
10820
10821 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
10822 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
10823 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
10824 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
10825 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
10826 the longest row.
10827
10828 @need 1250
10829 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
10830 like this:
10831
10832 @smallexample
10833 @group
10834 (let ((total 0)
10835 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10836 @var{body}@dots{})
10837 @end group
10838 @end smallexample
10839
10840 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10841 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
10842 evaluating the following expression:
10843
10844 @smallexample
10845 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10846 @end smallexample
10847
10848 @noindent
10849 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
10850 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
10851 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
10852 added to the total.
10853
10854 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
10855 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
10856 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
10857 done with the following expression:
10858
10859 @smallexample
10860 @group
10861 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10862 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10863 @end group
10864 @end smallexample
10865
10866 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
10867 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
10868 the @code{while} loop is simply:
10869
10870 @smallexample
10871 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10872 @end smallexample
10873
10874 @node Dec Example altogether
10875 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10876
10877 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
10878 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
10879 variables is unneeded!
10880
10881 @need 1250
10882 The function definition looks like this:
10883
10884 @smallexample
10885 @group
10886 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
10887 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
10888 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
10889 (let ((total 0)
10890 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10891 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10892 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10893 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10894 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
10895 total))
10896 @end group
10897 @end smallexample
10898
10899 As written, this function works.
10900
10901 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
10902
10903 @cindex Argument as local variable
10904 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
10905 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
10906 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
10907 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
10908 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
10909 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
10910 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
10911 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
10912
10913 @need 800
10914 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
10915
10916 @smallexample
10917 @group
10918 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
10919 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
10920 (let ((total 0))
10921 (while (> number 0)
10922 (setq total (+ total number))
10923 (setq number (1- number)))
10924 total))
10925 @end group
10926 @end smallexample
10927
10928 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
10929
10930 @enumerate
10931 @item
10932 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
10933 correct number of times.
10934
10935 @item
10936 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
10937 after being repeatedly evaluated.
10938
10939 @item
10940 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
10941 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
10942 number of times.
10943 @end enumerate
10944
10945 @node dolist dotimes
10946 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10947
10948 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10949 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
10950 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
10951 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
10952
10953 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
10954 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
10955 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
10956 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
10957
10958 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
10959
10960 @menu
10961 * dolist::
10962 * dotimes::
10963 @end menu
10964
10965 @node dolist
10966 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
10967 @findex dolist
10968
10969 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
10970 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
10971
10972 @need 1250
10973 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
10974
10975 @smallexample
10976 @group
10977 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10978
10979 (reverse animals)
10980 @end group
10981 @end smallexample
10982
10983 @need 800
10984 @noindent
10985 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
10986
10987 @smallexample
10988 @group
10989 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10990
10991 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
10992 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
10993 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
10994 (while list
10995 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
10996 (setq list (cdr list)))
10997 value))
10998
10999 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11000 @end group
11001 @end smallexample
11002
11003 @need 800
11004 @noindent
11005 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11006
11007 @smallexample
11008 @group
11009 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11010
11011 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11012 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11013 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11014 (dolist (element list value)
11015 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11016
11017 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11018 @end group
11019 @end smallexample
11020
11021 @need 1250
11022 @noindent
11023 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11024 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11025
11026 @smallexample
11027 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11028 @end smallexample
11029
11030 @noindent
11031 in the echo area.
11032
11033 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11034 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11035 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11036 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11037 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11038 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11039 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11040 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11041
11042 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11043 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11044 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11045 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11046 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11047 the loop.
11048
11049 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11050 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11051 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11052
11053 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11054 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops---it
11055 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own---and it automatically binds
11056 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11057 arguments.
11058
11059 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11060 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11061 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11062 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11063
11064 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11065 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11066 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11067 @code{value}.
11068
11069 @node dotimes
11070 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11071 @findex dotimes
11072
11073 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11074 loops a specific number of times.
11075
11076 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11077 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11078 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11079 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11080
11081 @need 1250
11082 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11083 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11084 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11085 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11086 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11087
11088 @smallexample
11089 @group
11090 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11091 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11092 (setq value (cons number value))))
11093
11094 @result{} (2 1 0)
11095 @end group
11096 @end smallexample
11097
11098 @noindent
11099 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11100 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11101 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11102
11103 @need 1250
11104 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11105 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11106
11107 @smallexample
11108 @group
11109 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11110 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11111 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11112 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11113 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11114
11115 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11116 @end group
11117 @end smallexample
11118
11119 @node Recursion
11120 @section Recursion
11121 @cindex Recursion
11122
11123 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11124 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11125 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11126 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11127 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11128 different `instance'.
11129
11130 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11131 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11132 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11133
11134 @menu
11135 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11136 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11137 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11138 * Recursive triangle function::
11139 * Recursion with cond::
11140 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11141 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11142 * No deferment solution::
11143 @end menu
11144
11145 @node Building Robots
11146 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11147 @cindex Building robots
11148 @cindex Robots, building
11149
11150 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11151 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11152 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11153 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11154 passed different arguments than the first.
11155
11156 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11157 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11158 entity; but all are clones.
11159
11160 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11161 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11162 when to stop.
11163
11164 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11165
11166 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11167 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11168 @code{defun} macro, you install the necessary equipment to build
11169 robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an assembly
11170 line. Robots with the same name are built according to the same
11171 blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number', but a
11172 different `serial number'.
11173
11174 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11175 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11176 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11177 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11178
11179 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11180 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11181
11182 @node Recursive Definition Parts
11183 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11184 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11185 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11186
11187 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11188 has three parts:
11189
11190 @enumerate
11191 @item
11192 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11193 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11194
11195 @item
11196 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11197 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11198
11199 @item
11200 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11201 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11202 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11203 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11204 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11205 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11206 @end enumerate
11207
11208 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11209 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11210 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11211 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11212 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11213
11214 @need 1200
11215 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11216 pattern looks like this:
11217
11218 @smallexample
11219 @group
11220 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11221 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11222 (if @var{do-again-test}
11223 @var{body}@dots{}
11224 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11225 @var{next-step-expression})))
11226 @end group
11227 @end smallexample
11228
11229 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11230 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11231
11232 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11233 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11234
11235 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11236
11237 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11238 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11239 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11240 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11241 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11242
11243 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11244 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11245
11246 @node Recursion with list
11247 @subsection Recursion with a List
11248
11249 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11250 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11251 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11252
11253 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11254 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11255 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11256 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11257 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11258 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11259 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11260
11261 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11262 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11263 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11264
11265 @findex print-elements-recursively
11266 @smallexample
11267 @group
11268 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11269
11270 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11271 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11272 Uses recursion."
11273 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11274 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11275 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11276 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11277
11278 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11279 @end group
11280 @end smallexample
11281
11282 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11283 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11284 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11285 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11286 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11287 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11288
11289 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11290 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11291 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11292 instance.
11293
11294 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11295 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11296 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11297
11298 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11299 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11300 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11301 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11302 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11303 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11304
11305 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11306 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11307 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11308 but is a separate individual.
11309
11310 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11311 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11312 works on a shorter list.
11313
11314 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11315 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11316 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11317 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11318 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11319
11320 @need 1200
11321 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11322 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11323
11324 @smallexample
11325 @group
11326 gazelle
11327
11328 giraffe
11329
11330 lion
11331
11332 tiger
11333 nil
11334 @end group
11335 @end smallexample
11336
11337 @need 2000
11338 @node Recursive triangle function
11339 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11340 @findex triangle-recursively
11341
11342 @need 1200
11343 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11344 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11345
11346 @smallexample
11347 @group
11348 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11349 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11350 Uses recursion."
11351 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11352 1 ; @r{then-part}
11353 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11354 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11355 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11356
11357 (triangle-recursively 7)
11358 @end group
11359 @end smallexample
11360
11361 @noindent
11362 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11363 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11364 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11365 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11366
11367 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11368 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11369 its argument.
11370
11371 @menu
11372 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11373 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11374 @end menu
11375
11376 @ifnottex
11377 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2
11378 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11379 @end ifnottex
11380
11381 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11382
11383 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11384 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11385 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11386 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11387 one row has one pebble in it.)
11388
11389 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11390 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11391
11392 @need 1200
11393 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11394 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11395 this:
11396
11397 @smallexample
11398 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11399 @end smallexample
11400
11401 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11402 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11403 in detail:
11404
11405 @table @i
11406 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11407
11408 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11409 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11410
11411 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11412
11413 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11414 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11415 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11416 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11417 function
11418
11419 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11420 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11421 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11422
11423 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11424
11425 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11426 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11427
11428 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11429
11430 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11431 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11432 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11433
11434 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11435 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11436 pebbles in it.
11437 @end table
11438
11439 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4
11440 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11441
11442 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11443 3.
11444
11445 @table @i
11446 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11447
11448 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11449 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11450 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11451 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11452 true.)
11453
11454 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11455
11456 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11457 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11458
11459 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11460
11461 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11462
11463 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11464 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11465 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11466
11467 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11468
11469 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11470 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11471 @end table
11472
11473 @noindent
11474 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11475
11476 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11477 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11478 called with an argument of 4:
11479
11480 @quotation
11481 @need 800
11482 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11483
11484 @smallexample
11485 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11486 @end smallexample
11487
11488 @need 800
11489 @noindent
11490 will return the value of evaluating
11491
11492 @smallexample
11493 (triangle-recursively 3)
11494 @end smallexample
11495
11496 @noindent
11497 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11498 third line.
11499 @end quotation
11500
11501 @noindent
11502 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11503
11504 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11505 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11506 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11507 evaluate itself.
11508
11509 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11510 requires that operations be deferred.
11511
11512 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11513 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11514 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11515 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11516 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11517 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11518 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11519 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11520
11521 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11522 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11523 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11524 on.
11525
11526 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11527 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11528
11529 @node Recursion with cond
11530 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11531 @findex cond
11532
11533 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11534 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11535 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11536 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11537
11538 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11539 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11540 explaining it.
11541
11542 @need 800
11543 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11544
11545 @smallexample
11546 @group
11547 (cond
11548 @var{body}@dots{})
11549 @end group
11550 @end smallexample
11551
11552 @noindent
11553 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11554
11555 @need 800
11556 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11557
11558 @smallexample
11559 @group
11560 (cond
11561 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11562 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11563 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11564 @dots{})
11565 @end group
11566 @end smallexample
11567
11568 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11569 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11570 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11571 @code{cond}.
11572
11573 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11574 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11575 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11576 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11577 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11578 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11579 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11580 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11581 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11582
11583 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11584 returns @code{nil}.
11585
11586 @need 1250
11587 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11588
11589 @smallexample
11590 @group
11591 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11592 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11593 ((= number 1) 1)
11594 ((> number 1)
11595 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11596 @end group
11597 @end smallexample
11598
11599 @noindent
11600 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11601 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11602 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11603 1.
11604
11605 @node Recursive Patterns
11606 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11607 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11608
11609 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11610 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11611 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11612
11613 @menu
11614 * Every::
11615 * Accumulate::
11616 * Keep::
11617 @end menu
11618
11619 @node Every
11620 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11621 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11622 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11623
11624 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11625 element of a list.
11626
11627 @need 1500
11628 The basic pattern is:
11629
11630 @itemize @bullet
11631 @item
11632 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11633 @item
11634 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11635 @itemize @minus
11636 @item
11637 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11638 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11639 @item
11640 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11641 with the results of acting on the rest.
11642 @end itemize
11643 @end itemize
11644
11645 @need 1500
11646 Here is example:
11647
11648 @smallexample
11649 @group
11650 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11651 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11652 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11653 nil
11654 (cons
11655 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11656 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11657 @end group
11658
11659 @group
11660 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11661 @result{} (1 4 9)
11662 @end group
11663 @end smallexample
11664
11665 @need 1200
11666 @noindent
11667 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11668 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11669 with the result of the recursive call.
11670
11671 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11672 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11673 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11674 empty.)
11675
11676 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11677 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11678 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11679 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11680
11681 @need 1250
11682 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11683
11684 @smallexample
11685 @group
11686 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11687 @end group
11688
11689 @group
11690 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11691 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11692 Uses recursion."
11693 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11694 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11695 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11696 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11697
11698 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11699 @end group
11700 @end smallexample
11701
11702 @need 1500
11703 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11704
11705 @itemize @bullet
11706 @item
11707 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11708 @item
11709 But when the list has at least one element,
11710 @itemize @minus
11711 @item
11712 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11713 @item
11714 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11715 @end itemize
11716 @end itemize
11717
11718 @node Accumulate
11719 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11720 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11721 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11722
11723 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11724 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11725 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11726 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11727
11728 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11729 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11730
11731 @need 1500
11732 The pattern is:
11733
11734 @itemize @bullet
11735 @item
11736 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11737 @item
11738 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11739 @itemize @minus
11740 @item
11741 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11742 some other combining function, with
11743 @item
11744 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11745 @end itemize
11746 @end itemize
11747
11748 @need 1500
11749 Here is an example:
11750
11751 @smallexample
11752 @group
11753 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
11754 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
11755 (if (not numbers-list)
11756 0
11757 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
11758 @end group
11759
11760 @group
11761 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
11762 @result{} 10
11763 @end group
11764 @end smallexample
11765
11766 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
11767 accumulate pattern.
11768
11769 @node Keep
11770 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
11771 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
11772 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
11773
11774 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
11775 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
11776 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
11777 meets a criterion.
11778
11779 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
11780 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
11781
11782 @need 1500
11783 The pattern has three parts:
11784
11785 @itemize @bullet
11786 @item
11787 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11788 @item
11789 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
11790 a test
11791 @itemize @minus
11792 @item
11793 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
11794 @item
11795 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11796 @end itemize
11797 @item
11798 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
11799 the test
11800 @itemize @minus
11801 @item
11802 skip on that element,
11803 @item
11804 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11805 @end itemize
11806 @end itemize
11807
11808 @need 1500
11809 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
11810
11811 @smallexample
11812 @group
11813 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
11814 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
11815 (cond
11816 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
11817 ((not word-list) nil)
11818
11819 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
11820 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
11821 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
11822 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
11823
11824 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
11825 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
11826 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
11827 @end group
11828
11829 @group
11830 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
11831 @result{} (one two six)
11832 @end group
11833 @end smallexample
11834
11835 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
11836 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
11837
11838 @node No Deferment
11839 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
11840 @cindex Deferment in recursion
11841 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
11842
11843 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
11844 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
11845 deferred until all can be done.
11846
11847 @need 800
11848 Here is the function definition:
11849
11850 @smallexample
11851 @group
11852 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11853 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11854 Uses recursion."
11855 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11856 1 ; @r{then-part}
11857 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11858 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11859 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11860 @end group
11861 @end smallexample
11862
11863 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
11864
11865 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
11866 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
11867 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
11868 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
11869
11870 @smallexample
11871 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
11872 @end smallexample
11873
11874 @noindent
11875 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
11876 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
11877 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
11878 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
11879 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
11880 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
11881 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
11882 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
11883
11884 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
11885 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
11886 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
11887 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
11888
11889 @need 800
11890 Now the total is:
11891
11892 @smallexample
11893 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
11894 @end smallexample
11895
11896 @need 800
11897 And what happens next?
11898
11899 @smallexample
11900 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
11901 @end smallexample
11902
11903 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
11904 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
11905 asks it to make a calculation.
11906
11907 @need 800
11908 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
11909
11910 @smallexample
11911 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
11912 @end smallexample
11913
11914 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
11915 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
11916 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
11917 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
11918 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
11919 more steps.
11920
11921 @node No deferment solution
11922 @subsection No Deferment Solution
11923 @cindex No deferment solution
11924 @cindex Defermentless solution
11925 @cindex Solution without deferment
11926
11927 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
11928 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
11929 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
11930 `constant space'.}. This requires
11931 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
11932 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
11933 function.
11934
11935 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
11936 does the work.
11937
11938 @need 1200
11939 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
11940 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
11941
11942 @smallexample
11943 @group
11944 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
11945 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11946 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
11947 duo that uses recursion."
11948 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
11949 @end group
11950 @end smallexample
11951
11952 @smallexample
11953 @group
11954 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
11955 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
11956 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
11957 that uses recursion."
11958 (if (> counter number)
11959 sum
11960 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
11961 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
11962 number))) ; @r{number}
11963 @end group
11964 @end smallexample
11965
11966 @need 1250
11967 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
11968 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
11969
11970 @smallexample
11971 @group
11972 (triangle-initialization 2)
11973 @result{} 3
11974 @end group
11975 @end smallexample
11976
11977 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
11978 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
11979 number of rows in the triangle.
11980
11981 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
11982 initialization values. These values are changed when
11983 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
11984 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
11985 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
11986 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
11987 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
11988 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
11989 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
11990 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
11991 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
11992
11993 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
11994 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
11995
11996 @need 1200
11997 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
11998 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
11999 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12000
12001 @smallexample
12002 (> 0 1)
12003 @end smallexample
12004
12005 @need 1200
12006 @noindent
12007 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12008 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12009
12010 @smallexample
12011 @group
12012 (triangle-recursive-helper
12013 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12014 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12015 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12016 @end group
12017 @end smallexample
12018
12019 @need 800
12020 @noindent
12021 which will first compute:
12022
12023 @smallexample
12024 @group
12025 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12026 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12027 1) ; @r{number}
12028 @exdent which is:
12029
12030 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12031 @end group
12032 @end smallexample
12033
12034 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12035 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12036 new instance with new arguments.
12037
12038 @need 800
12039 This new instance will be;
12040
12041 @smallexample
12042 @group
12043 (triangle-recursive-helper
12044 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12045 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12046 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12047
12048 @exdent which is:
12049
12050 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12051 @end group
12052 @end smallexample
12053
12054 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12055 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12056 expected.
12057
12058 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12059 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12060
12061 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12062
12063 @need 800
12064 In stages, the instances called will be:
12065
12066 @smallexample
12067 @group
12068 @r{sum counter number}
12069 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12070
12071 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12072
12073 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12074 @end group
12075 @end smallexample
12076
12077 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12078 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12079 which will be 3.
12080
12081 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12082 many resources in a computer.
12083
12084 @need 1500
12085 @node Looping exercise
12086 @section Looping Exercise
12087
12088 @itemize @bullet
12089 @item
12090 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12091 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12092
12093 @item
12094 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12095 adds the values.
12096
12097 @item
12098 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12099 using @code{cond}.
12100
12101 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12102 @item
12103 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12104 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12105 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12106 written in Texinfo.)
12107
12108 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12109 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12110 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12111 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12112 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12113 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12114 backwards.
12115
12116 For more information, see
12117 @ifinfo
12118 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12119 @end ifinfo
12120 @ifhtml
12121 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12122 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12123 Internet, see
12124 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12125 @end ifhtml
12126 @iftex
12127 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12128 Documentation Format}.
12129 @end iftex
12130 @end itemize
12131
12132 @node Regexp Search
12133 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12134 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12135 @cindex Regular expression searches
12136 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12137 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12138 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12139 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12140
12141 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12142 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12143 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12144 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12145 as `regexp'.
12146
12147 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12148 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12149 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12150 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12151 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12152 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12153 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12154 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12155 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12156 that spot.
12157
12158 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12159 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12160 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12161 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12162 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12163 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12164 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12165 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12166 introduces several new features.
12167
12168 @menu
12169 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12170 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12171 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12172 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12173 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12174 * Regexp Review::
12175 * re-search Exercises::
12176 @end menu
12177
12178 @node sentence-end
12179 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12180 @findex sentence-end
12181
12182 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12183 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12184
12185 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12186 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12187 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12188 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12189
12190 @smallexample
12191 [.?!]
12192 @end smallexample
12193
12194 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12195 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12196 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12197 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12198
12199 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12200 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12201 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12202 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12203 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12204 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12205 items as alternatives.
12206
12207 @need 800
12208 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12209
12210 @smallexample
12211 @group
12212 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12213 ^ ^^
12214 TAB SPC
12215 @end group
12216 @end smallexample
12217
12218 @noindent
12219 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12220 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12221 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12222
12223 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12224 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12225 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12226 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12227
12228 @need 1000
12229 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12230 this:
12231
12232 @smallexample
12233 @group
12234 [
12235 ]*
12236 @end group
12237 @end smallexample
12238
12239 @noindent
12240 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12241 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12242 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12243
12244 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12245 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12246 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12247 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12248 expression that looks like this:
12249
12250 @smallexample
12251 []\"')@}]*
12252 @end smallexample
12253
12254 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12255 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12256 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12257 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12258
12259 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12260 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12261 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12262
12263 @smallexample
12264 @group
12265 sentence-end
12266 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12267 ]*"
12268 @end group
12269 @end smallexample
12270
12271 @noindent
12272 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12273 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12274 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12275 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12276 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12277 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12278 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12279 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12280 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12281 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12282 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12283 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12284 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12285
12286 @ignore
12287 @noindent
12288 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12289 literally in the pattern.)
12290
12291 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12292
12293 @table @code
12294 @item [.?!]
12295 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12296 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12297 begin with one or other of these characters.
12298
12299 @item []\"')@}]*
12300 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12301 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12302 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12303 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12304 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12305 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12306 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12307 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12308 more times.
12309
12310 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12311 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12312 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12313 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12314 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12315 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12316 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12317 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12318 indicate what they are.
12319
12320 @item [@key{RET}]*
12321 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12322 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12323 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12324 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12325 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12326 @end table
12327 @end ignore
12328
12329 @node re-search-forward
12330 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12331 @findex re-search-forward
12332
12333 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12334 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12335 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12336
12337 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12338 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12339 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12340 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12341 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12342 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12343
12344 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12345 four arguments:
12346
12347 @enumerate
12348 @item
12349 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12350 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12351
12352 @item
12353 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12354 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12355
12356 @item
12357 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12358 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12359 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12360 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12361 if the search succeeds.
12362
12363 @item
12364 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12365 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12366 @end enumerate
12367
12368 @need 800
12369 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12370
12371 @smallexample
12372 @group
12373 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12374 @var{limit-of-search}
12375 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12376 @var{repeat-count})
12377 @end group
12378 @end smallexample
12379
12380 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12381 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12382 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12383 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12384 to.
12385
12386 @need 1200
12387 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12388 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12389
12390 @smallexample
12391 @group
12392 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12393 ]*"
12394 @end group
12395 @end smallexample
12396
12397 @noindent
12398 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12399 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12400 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12401 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12402
12403 @node forward-sentence
12404 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12405 @findex forward-sentence
12406
12407 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12408 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12409 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12410 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12411 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12412 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12413
12414 @menu
12415 * Complete forward-sentence::
12416 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12417 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12418 @end menu
12419
12420 @ifnottex
12421 @node Complete forward-sentence
12422 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12423 @end ifnottex
12424
12425 @need 1250
12426 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12427
12428 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12429 @smallexample
12430 @group
12431 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12432 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12433 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12434
12435 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12436 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12437 @end group
12438 @group
12439 (interactive "p")
12440 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12441 (let ((opoint (point))
12442 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12443 (while (< arg 0)
12444 (let ((pos (point))
12445 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12446 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12447 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12448 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12449 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12450 (goto-char par-beg)))
12451 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12452 @end group
12453 @group
12454 (while (> arg 0)
12455 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12456 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12457 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12458 (goto-char par-end)))
12459 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12460 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12461 @end group
12462 @end smallexample
12463
12464 @ignore
12465 GNU Emacs 21
12466 @smallexample
12467 @group
12468 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12469 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12470 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12471 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12472 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12473 terminates sentences as well."
12474 @end group
12475 @group
12476 (interactive "p")
12477 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12478 (while (< arg 0)
12479 (let ((par-beg
12480 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12481 (if (re-search-backward
12482 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12483 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12484 (goto-char par-beg)))
12485 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12486 (while (> arg 0)
12487 (let ((par-end
12488 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12489 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12490 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12491 (goto-char par-end)))
12492 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12493 @end group
12494 @end smallexample
12495 @end ignore
12496
12497 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12498 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12499 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12500
12501 @smallexample
12502 @group
12503 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12504 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12505 (interactive "p")
12506 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12507 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12508 (while (< arg 0)
12509 (let ((pos (point))
12510 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12511 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12512 (while (> arg 0)
12513 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12514 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12515 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12516 @end group
12517 @end smallexample
12518
12519 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12520 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12521 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12522
12523 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12524
12525 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12526
12527 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12528 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12529 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12530 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12531 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12532
12533 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12534 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12535 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12536 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12537 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12538 @code{nil}.
12539
12540 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12541 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12542 point, from before the search, is used in the
12543 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12544 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12545 @code{sentence-end} function.
12546
12547 @node fwd-sentence while loops
12548 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12549
12550 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12551 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12552 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12553 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12554 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12555 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12556 loop.
12557
12558 @need 1500
12559 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12560 looks like this:
12561
12562 @smallexample
12563 @group
12564 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12565 (let @var{varlist}
12566 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12567 @var{then-part}
12568 @var{else-part}
12569 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12570 @end group
12571 @end smallexample
12572
12573 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12574 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12575 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12576 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12577 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12578 the loop repeats.
12579
12580 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12581 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12582 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12583
12584 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12585 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12586 @code{if} expression.
12587
12588 @need 1250
12589 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12590
12591 @smallexample
12592 @group
12593 (let ((par-end
12594 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12595 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12596 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12597 (goto-char par-end)))
12598 @end group
12599 @end smallexample
12600
12601 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12602 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12603 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12604 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12605 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12606
12607 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12608 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12609 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12610 evaluates the expression
12611
12612 @smallexample
12613 @group
12614 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12615 @end group
12616 @end smallexample
12617
12618 @noindent
12619 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12620 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12621 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12622 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12623 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12624 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12625 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12626
12627 @need 1200
12628 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12629 expression that looks like this:
12630
12631 @smallexample
12632 @group
12633 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12634 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12635 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12636 @end group
12637 @end smallexample
12638
12639 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12640 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12641 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12642 expression is the regular expression search.
12643
12644 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12645 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12646 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12647
12648 @node fwd-sentence re-search
12649 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12650
12651 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12652 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12653 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12654 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12655
12656 @enumerate
12657 @item
12658 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12659 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12660
12661 @item
12662 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12663 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12664 successful.
12665 @end enumerate
12666
12667 @noindent
12668 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12669 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12670 conclusion of the search.
12671
12672 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12673 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12674 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12675 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12676 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12677 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12678 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12679 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12680 usually a period.
12681
12682 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12683 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12684 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12685 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12686 end of the paragraph.
12687
12688 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12689 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12690
12691 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12692 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12693 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12694 incorporating this pattern often.
12695
12696 @node forward-paragraph
12697 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12698 @findex forward-paragraph
12699
12700 @ignore
12701 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12702 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12703 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12704 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12705 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12706
12707 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12708 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12709 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12710 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12711 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12712 (interactive "p")
12713 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12714 (let* ((opoint (point))
12715 (fill-prefix-regexp
12716 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12717 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12718 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12719 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12720 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12721 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12722 ;; work normally with indented text.
12723 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12724 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12725 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12726 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12727 paragraph-start))
12728 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12729 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12730 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12731 paragraph-separate))
12732 (parsep
12733 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12734 (concat parsep "\\|"
12735 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12736 parsep))
12737 ;; This is used for searching.
12738 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12739 start found-start)
12740 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
12741 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
12742 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
12743 (looking-at parsep))
12744 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12745 (setq start (point))
12746 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
12747 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
12748 (while (and (not (bobp))
12749 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12750 (looking-at parsep)))
12751 (forward-line -1))
12752 (if (bobp)
12753 nil
12754 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12755 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
12756 (end-of-line)
12757 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
12758 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
12759 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12760 (let (multiple-lines)
12761 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
12762 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12763 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12764 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12765 (unless (= (point) start)
12766 (setq multiple-lines t))
12767 (forward-line -1))
12768 (move-to-left-margin)
12769 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
12770 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
12771 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
12772 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
12773 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
12774 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12775 ;; multiple-lines
12776 ;; (forward-line 1))
12777 (not (bobp)))
12778 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
12779 (setq found-start t)
12780 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
12781 ;; REAL parstart.
12782 (progn (setq start (point))
12783 (move-to-left-margin)
12784 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12785 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
12786 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
12787 (bobp)
12788 (get-text-property
12789 (1- start) 'hard)))))
12790 (setq found-start nil)
12791 (goto-char start))
12792 found-start)
12793 ;; Found one.
12794 (progn
12795 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
12796 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
12797 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
12798 (while (and (not (eobp))
12799 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12800 (looking-at parsep)))
12801 (forward-line 1))
12802 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
12803 (end-of-line 0)
12804 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
12805 (forward-char 1)
12806 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
12807 (if (not (bolp))
12808 (forward-line 1))))
12809 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
12810 (goto-char (point-min))))))
12811
12812 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
12813 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
12814 (while (and (not (eobp))
12815 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12816 (looking-at parsep))
12817 (forward-line 1))
12818 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
12819 ;; ... and one more line.
12820 (forward-line 1)
12821 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12822 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12823 (while (and (not (eobp))
12824 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12825 (not (looking-at parsep))
12826 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12827 (forward-line 1))
12828 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
12829 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
12830 (goto-char start)
12831 (not (eobp)))
12832 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12833 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12834 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
12835 (and use-hard-newlines
12836 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
12837 (forward-char 1))
12838 (if (< (point) (point-max))
12839 (goto-char start))))
12840 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
12841 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
12842 arg))
12843 @end ignore
12844
12845 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
12846 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
12847 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
12848 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
12849
12850 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
12851 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
12852 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
12853 fill prefix.
12854
12855 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
12856 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
12857 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
12858 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
12859 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
12860 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
12861 prefixes.)
12862
12863 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
12864 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
12865 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
12866 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
12867 with the fill prefix.
12868
12869 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
12870 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
12871 This is an added complication.
12872
12873 @menu
12874 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
12875 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
12876 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
12877 @end menu
12878
12879 @ifnottex
12880 @node forward-paragraph in brief
12881 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
12882 @end ifnottex
12883
12884 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
12885 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
12886 can be daunting!
12887
12888 @need 800
12889 In outline, the function looks like this:
12890
12891 @smallexample
12892 @group
12893 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12894 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12895 (interactive "p")
12896 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12897 (let*
12898 @var{varlist}
12899 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
12900 @dots{}
12901 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
12902 @dots{}
12903 @end group
12904 @end smallexample
12905
12906 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
12907 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
12908
12909 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
12910 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
12911 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
12912 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
12913 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
12914 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
12915 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
12916 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
12917 familiar part of this function.
12918
12919 @node fwd-para let
12920 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
12921
12922 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
12923 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
12924 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
12925
12926 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
12927 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
12928 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
12929 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
12930
12931 @ignore
12932 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
12933 @end ignore
12934
12935 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
12936
12937 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
12938 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12939 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
12940 @code{found-start}.
12941
12942 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
12943 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
12944
12945 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
12946 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
12947 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
12948
12949 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
12950 evaluating the following list:
12951
12952 @smallexample
12953 @group
12954 (and fill-prefix
12955 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12956 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12957 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
12958 @end group
12959 @end smallexample
12960
12961 @noindent
12962 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
12963
12964 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
12965 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
12966 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
12967 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
12968 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
12969 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
12970 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
12971 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
12972 arguments are true.
12973 @findex and
12974
12975 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
12976 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
12977 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
12978 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
12979
12980 @table @code
12981 @item fill-prefix
12982 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
12983 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
12984 @code{nil}.
12985
12986 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
12987 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
12988 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
12989 not a useful fill prefix.
12990
12991 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12992 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
12993 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
12994 true value such as @code{t}.
12995
12996 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
12997 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
12998 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
12999 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13000 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13001 @end table
13002
13003 @findex regexp-quote
13004 @noindent
13005 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13006 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13007 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13008 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13009 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13010 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13011 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13012 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13013
13014 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13015 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13016 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13017 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13018 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13019
13020 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13021 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13022 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13023 @code{nil} or some other value.
13024
13025 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13026 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13027 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13028 what separates paragraphs.)
13029
13030 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13031 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13032 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13033 of the pattern.
13034
13035 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13036 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13037 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13038 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13039 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13040 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13041
13042 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13043 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13044 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13045
13046 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13047 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13048 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13049 section.
13050
13051 @node fwd-para while
13052 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13053
13054 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13055 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13056 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13057 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13058 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13059 forward one paragraph.
13060
13061 @ignore
13062 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13063
13064 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13065 (while (and (not (eobp))
13066 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13067 (looking-at parsep))
13068 (forward-line 1))
13069 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13070 ;; ... and one more line.
13071 (forward-line 1)
13072
13073 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13074 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13075 (while (and (not (eobp))
13076 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13077 (not (looking-at parsep))
13078 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13079 (forward-line 1))
13080
13081 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13082 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13083 (goto-char start)
13084 (not (eobp)))
13085 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13086 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13087 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13088 (and use-hard-newlines
13089 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13090 (forward-char 1))
13091
13092 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13093 (goto-char start))))
13094 @end ignore
13095
13096 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13097 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13098
13099 @need 800
13100 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13101
13102 @smallexample
13103 @group
13104 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13105 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13106
13107 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13108 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13109 (while (and (not (eobp))
13110 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13111 (looking-at parsep))
13112 (forward-line 1))
13113 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13114 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13115 ;; ... and one more line.
13116 (forward-line 1)
13117 @end group
13118
13119 @group
13120 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13121 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13122 ;; we go forward line by line
13123 (while (and (not (eobp))
13124 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13125 (not (looking-at parsep))
13126 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13127 (forward-line 1))
13128 @end group
13129
13130 @group
13131 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13132 ;; we go forward character by character
13133 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13134 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13135 (goto-char start)
13136 (not (eobp)))
13137 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13138 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13139 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13140 (and use-hard-newlines
13141 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13142 (forward-char 1))
13143 @end group
13144
13145 @group
13146 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13147 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13148 ;; for sp-parstart
13149 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13150 (goto-char start))))
13151 @end group
13152 @end smallexample
13153
13154 @findex eobp
13155 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13156 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13157 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13158 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13159 of the buffer---that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13160 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P}---we decrease the value
13161 of @code{arg} by one.
13162
13163 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13164 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13165 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13166 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13167 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13168
13169 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13170 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13171 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13172
13173 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13174 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13175 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13176 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13177 margin of the current line.
13178
13179 @findex looking-at
13180 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13181 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13182 its argument.
13183
13184 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13185 sense as you come to understand it.
13186
13187 @need 800
13188 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13189
13190 @smallexample
13191 @group
13192 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13193 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13194 ;; we go forward line by line
13195 (while (and (not (eobp))
13196 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13197 (not (looking-at parsep))
13198 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13199 (forward-line 1))
13200 @end group
13201 @end smallexample
13202
13203 @noindent
13204 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13205 as four conditions are true:
13206
13207 @enumerate
13208 @item
13209 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13210
13211 @item
13212 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13213 not at the end of the buffer.
13214
13215 @item
13216 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13217
13218 @item
13219 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13220 @end enumerate
13221
13222 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13223 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13224 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13225 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13226
13227 @need 1250
13228 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13229
13230 @smallexample
13231 @group
13232 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13233 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13234 (goto-char start)
13235 (not (eobp)))
13236 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13237 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13238 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13239 (and use-hard-newlines
13240 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13241 (forward-char 1))
13242 @end group
13243 @end smallexample
13244
13245 @noindent
13246 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13247 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13248 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13249 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13250 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13251 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13252
13253 @need 800
13254 The two expressions,
13255
13256 @smallexample
13257 @group
13258 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13259 (goto-char start)
13260 @end group
13261 @end smallexample
13262
13263 @noindent
13264 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13265 search.
13266
13267 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13268 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13269 the last search.
13270
13271 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13272 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13273 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13274 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13275 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13276 @code{sp-parstart}.
13277
13278 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13279 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13280 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13281 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13282
13283 @findex match-beginning
13284 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13285 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13286 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13287 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13288 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13289 of that pattern.
13290
13291 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13292 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13293 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13294 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13295 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13296
13297 @need 1250
13298 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13299
13300 @smallexample
13301 @group
13302 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13303 (goto-char start))))
13304 @end group
13305 @end smallexample
13306
13307 @noindent
13308 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13309 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13310 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13311
13312 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13313 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13314
13315 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13316 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13317 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13318 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13319 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13320 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13321 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13322 a car with his eyes shut!)
13323
13324 @node etags
13325 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13326 @findex etags
13327 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13328
13329 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13330 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13331 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13332 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13333 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13334 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13335
13336 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13337 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13338 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13339 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13340 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13341 sources.)
13342
13343 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13344 lack one.
13345
13346 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13347 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13348 the name is in upper case letters.
13349
13350 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13351 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13352 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13353 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13354
13355 @need 1250
13356 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13357 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13358 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13359 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13360 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13361
13362 @smallexample
13363 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13364 @end smallexample
13365
13366 @noindent
13367 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13368
13369 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13370 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13371 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13372 Lisp files in that directory.
13373
13374 @need 1250
13375 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13376 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13377 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13378 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13379
13380 @smallexample
13381 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13382 @end smallexample
13383
13384 @need 1250
13385 Type
13386
13387 @smallexample
13388 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13389 @end smallexample
13390
13391 @noindent
13392 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13393 list of supported languages.
13394
13395 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13396 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13397 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13398 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13399 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13400 file name and contents.
13401
13402 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13403 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13404 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13405 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13406
13407 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13408 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13409 program to attempt to find it.
13410
13411 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13412 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13413 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13414 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13415 @file{TAGS} files.
13416
13417 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13418 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13419 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13420 visit-tags-table}.
13421
13422 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13423 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13424 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13425 @findex make tags
13426
13427 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13428 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13429 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13430 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13431 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13432
13433 @need 1250
13434 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13435 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13436
13437 @smallexample
13438 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13439 @end smallexample
13440
13441 @noindent
13442 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13443 as well as with some other source packages.)
13444
13445 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13446 Manual}.
13447
13448 @node Regexp Review
13449 @section Review
13450
13451 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13452
13453 @table @code
13454 @item while
13455 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13456 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13457 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13458
13459 @need 1250
13460 For example:
13461
13462 @smallexample
13463 @group
13464 (let ((foo 2))
13465 (while (> foo 0)
13466 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13467 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13468
13469 @result{} foo is 2.
13470 foo is 1.
13471 nil
13472 @end group
13473 @end smallexample
13474
13475 @noindent
13476 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13477 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13478 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13479 line.)
13480
13481 @item re-search-forward
13482 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13483 just after it.
13484
13485 @noindent
13486 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13487
13488 @enumerate
13489 @item
13490 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13491 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13492
13493 @item
13494 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13495
13496 @item
13497 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13498 error message.
13499
13500 @item
13501 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13502 search goes backwards.
13503 @end enumerate
13504
13505 @item let*
13506 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13507 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13508 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13509 variables bound earlier, if any.
13510
13511 @need 1250
13512 For example:
13513
13514 @smallexample
13515 @group
13516 (let* ((foo 7)
13517 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13518 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13519 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13520 @end group
13521 @end smallexample
13522
13523 @item match-beginning
13524 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13525 expression search.
13526
13527 @item looking-at
13528 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13529 which should be a regular expression.
13530
13531 @item eobp
13532 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13533 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13534 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13535 the buffer is narrowed.
13536 @end table
13537
13538 @need 1500
13539 @node re-search Exercises
13540 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13541
13542 @itemize @bullet
13543 @item
13544 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13545 or more blank lines in sequence.
13546
13547 @item
13548 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13549 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13550 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13551 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13552 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13553 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13554 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13555 @end itemize
13556
13557 @node Counting Words
13558 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13559 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13560 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13561
13562 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13563 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13564 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13565 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13566
13567 @menu
13568 * Why Count Words::
13569 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13570 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13571 * Counting Exercise::
13572 @end menu
13573
13574 @ifnottex
13575 @node Why Count Words
13576 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13577 @end ifnottex
13578
13579 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13580 number of lines and words within a region.
13581
13582 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13583 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13584 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13585 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13586 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13587 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13588 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13589 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13590 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13591
13592 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13593 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13594 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13595
13596 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13597 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13598 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13599
13600 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13601 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13602 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13603 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13604 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13605 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13606 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13607 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13608 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13609
13610 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13611 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13612 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13613 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13614 or to a @code{while} loop.
13615
13616 @menu
13617 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13618 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13619 @end menu
13620
13621 @ifnottex
13622 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13623 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13624 @end ifnottex
13625
13626 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13627 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13628 interactive.
13629
13630 @need 800
13631 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13632
13633 @smallexample
13634 @group
13635 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13636 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13637 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13638 @var{body}@dots{})
13639 @end group
13640 @end smallexample
13641
13642 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13643
13644 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13645 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13646 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13647 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13648 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13649
13650 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13651 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13652 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13653 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13654 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13655 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13656 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13657 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13658 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13659 this is routine.
13660
13661 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13662 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13663 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13664 a message to the user.
13665
13666 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13667 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13668 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13669 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13670 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13671 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13672 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13673 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13674
13675 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13676 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13677 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13678 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13679 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13680
13681 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13682 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13683 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13684
13685 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13686 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13687 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13688 word by word.
13689
13690 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13691 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13692 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13693 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13694 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13695 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13696 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13697 the regexp must be optional.)
13698
13699 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13700 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13701 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13702 this is:
13703
13704 @smallexample
13705 \w+\W*
13706 @end smallexample
13707
13708 @noindent
13709 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13710 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13711 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13712 Reference Manual}.
13713
13714 @need 800
13715 The search expression looks like this:
13716
13717 @smallexample
13718 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13719 @end smallexample
13720
13721 @noindent
13722 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13723 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13724 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13725 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13726 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13727 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
13728 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13729 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13730
13731 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13732 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13733 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13734
13735 @smallexample
13736 (setq count (1+ count))
13737 @end smallexample
13738
13739 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13740 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
13741 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
13742 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
13743 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
13744 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
13745 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
13746 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
13747 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
13748 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
13749 special form is appropriate.
13750
13751 @need 1500
13752 All this leads to the following function definition:
13753
13754 @smallexample
13755 @group
13756 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13757 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13758 "Print number of words in the region.
13759 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
13760 character followed by at least one character that
13761 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
13762 table determines which characters these are."
13763 (interactive "r")
13764 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13765 @end group
13766
13767 @group
13768 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13769 (save-excursion
13770 (goto-char beginning)
13771 (let ((count 0))
13772 @end group
13773
13774 @group
13775 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13776 (while (< (point) end)
13777 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13778 (setq count (1+ count)))
13779 @end group
13780
13781 @group
13782 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13783 (cond ((zerop count)
13784 (message
13785 "The region does NOT have any words."))
13786 ((= 1 count)
13787 (message
13788 "The region has 1 word."))
13789 (t
13790 (message
13791 "The region has %d words." count))))))
13792 @end group
13793 @end smallexample
13794
13795 @noindent
13796 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
13797
13798 @node Whitespace Bug
13799 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13800
13801 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
13802 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
13803 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
13804 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
13805 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
13806 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
13807 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
13808 like this:
13809
13810 @smallexample
13811 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
13812 @end smallexample
13813
13814 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
13815 bugs yourself.
13816
13817 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
13818 @ifinfo
13819 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
13820 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
13821
13822 @smallexample
13823 @group
13824 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13825 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13826 "Print number of words in the region.
13827 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
13828 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
13829 syntax table determines which characters these are."
13830 @end group
13831 @group
13832 (interactive "r")
13833 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13834 @end group
13835
13836 @group
13837 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13838 (save-excursion
13839 (goto-char beginning)
13840 (let ((count 0))
13841 @end group
13842
13843 @group
13844 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13845 (while (< (point) end)
13846 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13847 (setq count (1+ count)))
13848 @end group
13849
13850 @group
13851 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13852 (cond ((zerop count)
13853 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
13854 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
13855 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
13856 @end group
13857 @end smallexample
13858 @end ifinfo
13859
13860 @need 1000
13861 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
13862
13863 @smallexample
13864 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
13865 @end smallexample
13866
13867 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
13868 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
13869 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
13870
13871 @smallexample
13872 one two three
13873 @end smallexample
13874
13875 @noindent
13876 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
13877
13878 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
13879 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
13880 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
13881 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
13882 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
13883 that the region has one word!
13884
13885 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
13886 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
13887 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
13888 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
13889 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
13890 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
13891 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
13892 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
13893
13894 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
13895
13896 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
13897 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
13898 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13899 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
13900 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
13901 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
13902 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
13903 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
13904 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
13905 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
13906 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
13907 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
13908 the marked region.
13909
13910 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
13911 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
13912 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
13913 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
13914 in the buffer, the search fails.
13915
13916 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
13917 extend outside of the region.
13918
13919 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
13920 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
13921 simple as you might think.
13922
13923 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
13924 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
13925 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
13926 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
13927 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
13928 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
13929 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
13930 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
13931
13932 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
13933 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
13934 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
13935 to the regular expression search expression:
13936
13937 @smallexample
13938 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
13939 @end smallexample
13940
13941 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13942 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
13943 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
13944 @samp{Search failed}.
13945
13946 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
13947 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13948 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
13949 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
13950 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
13951
13952 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
13953 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
13954 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
13955
13956 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
13957 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
13958 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
13959
13960 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
13961 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13962 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
13963 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
13964 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
13965 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
13966 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
13967 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
13968 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
13969 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
13970 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
13971
13972 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
13973 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
13974 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
13975 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
13976 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
13977 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
13978
13979 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
13980 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
13981 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
13982 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
13983
13984 @smallexample
13985 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
13986 @end smallexample
13987
13988 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
13989 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
13990 @iftex
13991 @noindent
13992 (For information about @code{and}, see
13993 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
13994 @end iftex
13995 @ifinfo
13996 @noindent
13997 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
13998 information about @code{and}.)
13999 @end ifinfo
14000
14001 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14002 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14003 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14004 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14005 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14006 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14007 other of its messages.
14008
14009 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14010 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14011 Here is what it looks like:
14012
14013 @smallexample
14014 @group
14015 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14016 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14017 "Print number of words in the region."
14018 (interactive "r")
14019 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14020 @end group
14021
14022 @group
14023 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14024 (save-excursion
14025 (let ((count 0))
14026 (goto-char beginning)
14027 @end group
14028
14029 @group
14030 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14031 (while (and (< (point) end)
14032 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14033 (setq count (1+ count)))
14034 @end group
14035
14036 @group
14037 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14038 (cond ((zerop count)
14039 (message
14040 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14041 ((= 1 count)
14042 (message
14043 "The region has 1 word."))
14044 (t
14045 (message
14046 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14047 @end group
14048 @end smallexample
14049
14050 @node recursive-count-words
14051 @section Count Words Recursively
14052 @cindex Count words recursively
14053 @cindex Recursively counting words
14054 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14055
14056 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14057 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14058
14059 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14060 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14061 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14062 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14063
14064 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14065 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14066 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14067 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14068 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14069 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14070 message; the other will return the word count.
14071
14072 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14073 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14074
14075 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14076 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14077 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14078 determine how many words are in the region.
14079
14080 @need 1250
14081 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14082 previous versions:
14083
14084 @smallexample
14085 @group
14086 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14087 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14088 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14089 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14090 @end group
14091 @group
14092
14093 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14094 (@var{explanatory message})
14095 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14096 @end group
14097 @group
14098
14099 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14100 @var{recursive call}
14101 @end group
14102 @group
14103
14104 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14105 @var{message providing word count}))
14106 @end group
14107 @end smallexample
14108
14109 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14110 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14111 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14112 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14113 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14114 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14115 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14116 user.
14117
14118 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14119 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14120 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14121 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14122
14123 @need 1250
14124 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14125
14126 @smallexample
14127 @group
14128 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14129 "Print number of words in the region."
14130 (interactive "r")
14131 @end group
14132
14133 @group
14134 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14135 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14136 (save-excursion
14137 (goto-char beginning)
14138 @end group
14139
14140 @group
14141 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14142 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14143 @end group
14144
14145 @group
14146 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14147 (cond ((zerop count)
14148 (message
14149 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14150 ((= 1 count)
14151 (message
14152 "The region has 1 word."))
14153 (t
14154 (message
14155 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14156 @end group
14157 @end smallexample
14158
14159 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14160
14161 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14162 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14163
14164 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14165 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14166 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14167 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14168 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14169 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14170 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14171 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14172 argument.
14173
14174 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14175 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14176
14177 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14178 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14179 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14180 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14181 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14182 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14183
14184 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14185
14186 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14187 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14188
14189 @need 1250
14190 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14191
14192 @smallexample
14193 @group
14194 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14195 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14196 @var{do-again-test}
14197 @var{next-step-expression}
14198 @var{recursive call})
14199 @end group
14200 @end smallexample
14201
14202 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14203 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14204 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14205 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14206 function should return zero.
14207
14208 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14209 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14210
14211 @need 800
14212 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14213
14214 @smallexample
14215 @group
14216 (and (< (point) region-end)
14217 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14218 @end group
14219 @end smallexample
14220
14221 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14222 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14223 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14224 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14225 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14226
14227 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14228 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14229 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14230 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14231 search failed because there were no words to find.
14232
14233 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14234 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14235 part of the do-again-test.
14236
14237 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14238 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14239 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14240 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14241 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14242 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14243
14244 @need 1200
14245 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14246 function looks like this:
14247
14248 @smallexample
14249 @group
14250 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14251 ;; @r{then}
14252 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14253 ;; @r{else}
14254 @var{return-zero})
14255 @end group
14256 @end smallexample
14257
14258 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14259
14260 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14261 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14262 systematically.
14263
14264 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14265 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14266 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14267 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14268 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14269
14270 @need 800
14271 Consider several cases:
14272
14273 @itemize @bullet
14274 @item
14275 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14276 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14277 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14278 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14279
14280 @item
14281 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14282 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14283 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14284 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14285
14286 @item
14287 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14288 @end itemize
14289
14290 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14291 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14292 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14293 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14294
14295 @need 1200
14296 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14297 adds one to its argument.
14298
14299 @smallexample
14300 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14301 @end smallexample
14302
14303 @need 1200
14304 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14305 this:
14306
14307 @smallexample
14308 @group
14309 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14310 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14311
14312 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14313 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14314 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14315 @end group
14316
14317 @group
14318 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14319 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14320
14321 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14322 0))
14323 @end group
14324 @end smallexample
14325
14326 @need 1250
14327 Let's examine how this works:
14328
14329 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14330 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14331
14332 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14333 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14334 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14335 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14336 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14337 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14338 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14339
14340 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14341 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14342 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14343 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14344 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14345 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14346 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14347 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14348
14349 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14350 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14351 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14352 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14353 the correct amount.
14354
14355 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14356 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14357 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14358 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14359
14360 @need 1250
14361 @noindent
14362 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14363
14364 @need 1250
14365 @noindent
14366 The recursive function:
14367
14368 @findex recursive-count-words
14369 @smallexample
14370 @group
14371 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14372 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14373 @end group
14374
14375 @group
14376 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14377 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14378 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14379 @end group
14380
14381 @group
14382 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14383 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14384
14385 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14386 0))
14387 @end group
14388 @end smallexample
14389
14390 @need 800
14391 @noindent
14392 The wrapper:
14393
14394 @smallexample
14395 @group
14396 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14397 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14398 "Print number of words in the region.
14399 @end group
14400
14401 @group
14402 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14403 character followed by at least one character that is
14404 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14405 determines which characters these are."
14406 @end group
14407 @group
14408 (interactive "r")
14409 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14410 (save-excursion
14411 (goto-char beginning)
14412 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14413 @end group
14414 @group
14415 (cond ((zerop count)
14416 (message
14417 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14418 @end group
14419 @group
14420 ((= 1 count)
14421 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14422 (t
14423 (message
14424 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14425 @end group
14426 @end smallexample
14427
14428 @node Counting Exercise
14429 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14430
14431 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14432 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14433 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14434
14435 @node Words in a defun
14436 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14437 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14438 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14439
14440 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14441 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14442 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14443 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14444 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14445 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14446 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14447
14448 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14449 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14450 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14451 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14452 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14453 and this will tell.
14454
14455 @menu
14456 * Divide and Conquer::
14457 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14458 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14459 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14460 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14461 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14462 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14463 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14464 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14465 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14466 @end menu
14467
14468 @ifnottex
14469 @node Divide and Conquer
14470 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14471 @end ifnottex
14472
14473 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14474 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14475 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14476 steps must be:
14477
14478 @itemize @bullet
14479 @item
14480 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14481 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14482
14483 @item
14484 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14485 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14486 function.
14487
14488 @item
14489 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14490 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14491 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14492 definitions within them.
14493
14494 @item
14495 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14496 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14497 a graph.
14498
14499 @item
14500 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14501 @end itemize
14502
14503 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14504 be difficult.
14505
14506 @node Words and Symbols
14507 @section What to Count?
14508 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14509
14510 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14511 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14512 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14513 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14514 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14515 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14516 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14517 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14518 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14519 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14520 of ten words and symbols.
14521
14522 @smallexample
14523 @group
14524 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14525 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14526 (* 7 number))
14527 @end group
14528 @end smallexample
14529
14530 @noindent
14531 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14532 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14533 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14534 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14535 ten! Something is wrong!
14536
14537 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14538 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14539 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14540 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14541 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14542 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14543
14544 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14545 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14546 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14547 regexp is:
14548
14549 @smallexample
14550 "\\w+\\W*"
14551 @end smallexample
14552
14553 @noindent
14554 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14555 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14556 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14557 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14558 of its own.
14559
14560 @node Syntax
14561 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14562 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14563
14564 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14565 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14566 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14567 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14568 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14569 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14570 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14571 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14572 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14573
14574 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14575 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14576 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14577 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14578 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14579 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14580 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14581
14582 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14583 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14584
14585 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14586 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14587 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14588 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14589 constituent character; there are others, too.
14590
14591 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14592 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14593 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14594
14595 @need 1200
14596 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14597 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14598
14599 @smallexample
14600 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14601 @end smallexample
14602
14603 @noindent
14604 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14605 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14606 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14607 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14608 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14609 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14610 characters must be matched at least once.
14611
14612 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14613 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14614 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14615 I thought I could define this with the following:
14616
14617 @smallexample
14618 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14619 @end smallexample
14620
14621 @noindent
14622 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14623 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14624 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14625 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14626
14627 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14628 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14629 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14630 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14631 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14632 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14633 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14634 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14635 then followed optionally by white space.
14636
14637 @need 800
14638 Here is the full regular expression:
14639
14640 @smallexample
14641 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14642 @end smallexample
14643
14644 @node count-words-in-defun
14645 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14646 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14647
14648 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14649 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14650 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14651 versions.
14652
14653 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14654 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14655 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14656 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14657 simplify the definition a little.
14658
14659 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14660 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14661 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14662 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14663 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14664 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14665 function.
14666
14667 @need 1250
14668 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14669
14670 @smallexample
14671 @group
14672 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14673 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14674 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14675 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14676 @var{return count})
14677 @end group
14678 @end smallexample
14679
14680 @noindent
14681 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14682
14683 First, the set up.
14684
14685 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14686 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14687 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14688 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14689 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14690 end of the definition.
14691
14692 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14693 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14694 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14695 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14696 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14697 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14698 place point where we wish to start.
14699
14700 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14701 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14702 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14703
14704 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14705 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14706 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14707 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14708
14709 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14710 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14711 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14712 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14713 looping.
14714
14715 @need 1250
14716 The code looks like this:
14717
14718 @smallexample
14719 @group
14720 (beginning-of-defun)
14721 (let ((count 0)
14722 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14723 @end group
14724 @end smallexample
14725
14726 @noindent
14727 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14728 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14729 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14730 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14731 definition.
14732
14733 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14734 is the @code{while} loop.
14735
14736 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14737 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
14738 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
14739 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
14740 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
14741 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
14742
14743 @smallexample
14744 @group
14745 (while (and (< (point) end)
14746 (re-search-forward
14747 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
14748 (setq count (1+ count)))
14749 @end group
14750 @end smallexample
14751
14752 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
14753 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
14754 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
14755 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
14756
14757 @need 1250
14758 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
14759
14760 @findex count-words-in-defun
14761 @smallexample
14762 @group
14763 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14764 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
14765 (beginning-of-defun)
14766 (let ((count 0)
14767 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14768 @end group
14769 @group
14770 (while
14771 (and (< (point) end)
14772 (re-search-forward
14773 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14774 end t))
14775 (setq count (1+ count)))
14776 count))
14777 @end group
14778 @end smallexample
14779
14780 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
14781 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
14782 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
14783 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
14784
14785 @smallexample
14786 @group
14787 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
14788 (defun count-words-defun ()
14789 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
14790 (interactive)
14791 (message
14792 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
14793 @end group
14794 @group
14795 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
14796 (cond
14797 ((zerop count)
14798 (message
14799 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
14800 @end group
14801 @group
14802 ((= 1 count)
14803 (message
14804 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
14805 (t
14806 (message
14807 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
14808 @end group
14809 @end smallexample
14810
14811 @need 800
14812 @noindent
14813 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
14814
14815 @smallexample
14816 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
14817 @end smallexample
14818
14819 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
14820 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
14821 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
14822
14823 @smallexample
14824 @group
14825 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14826 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14827 (* 7 number))
14828 @result{} 10
14829 @end group
14830 @end smallexample
14831
14832 @noindent
14833 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
14834
14835 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
14836 several definitions within a single file.
14837
14838 @node Several defuns
14839 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
14840
14841 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
14842 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
14843 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
14844 statistics on one file.
14845
14846 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
14847 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
14848
14849 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
14850 file with information about many other files; this means that the
14851 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
14852 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
14853 messages.
14854
14855 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
14856 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
14857 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
14858 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
14859 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
14860
14861 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
14862 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
14863 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
14864 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
14865 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
14866 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
14867 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
14868 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
14869 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
14870 is almost all there is to it.
14871
14872 @need 800
14873 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
14874
14875 @smallexample
14876 @group
14877 (goto-char (point-min))
14878 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14879 (setq lengths-list
14880 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14881 @end group
14882 @end smallexample
14883
14884 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
14885 contains the function definitions.
14886
14887 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
14888 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
14889 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
14890
14891 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
14892
14893 @node Find a File
14894 @section Find a File
14895 @cindex Find a File
14896
14897 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
14898 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
14899 problem.
14900
14901 @need 1200
14902 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
14903
14904 @smallexample
14905 @group
14906 (defun find-file (filename)
14907 "Edit file FILENAME.
14908 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14909 creating one if none already exists."
14910 (interactive "FFind file: ")
14911 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
14912 @end group
14913 @end smallexample
14914
14915 @noindent
14916 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
14917 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
14918 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
14919 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
14920 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
14921
14922 @ignore
14923 In Emacs 22
14924 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
14925 "Edit file FILENAME.
14926 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14927 creating one if none already exists.
14928 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
14929 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
14930 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
14931
14932 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
14933 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
14934 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
14935
14936 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
14937 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
14938 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
14939 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
14940 (if (listp value)
14941 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
14942 (switch-to-buffer value))))
14943 @end ignore
14944
14945 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
14946 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
14947 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
14948 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
14949 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
14950
14951 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
14952 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
14953 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
14954 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
14955 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
14956 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
14957
14958 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
14959 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
14960 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
14961 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
14962 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
14963 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
14964 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
14965
14966 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
14967 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
14968 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
14969 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
14970 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
14971 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
14972 our own expression.
14973
14974 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
14975
14976 @node lengths-list-file
14977 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
14978
14979 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
14980 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
14981 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
14982 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
14983 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
14984 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
14985 @findex lengths-list-file
14986
14987 @smallexample
14988 @group
14989 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
14990 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
14991 The returned list is a list of numbers.
14992 Each number is the number of words or
14993 symbols in one function definition."
14994 @end group
14995 @group
14996 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
14997 (save-excursion
14998 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
14999 (lengths-list))
15000 (set-buffer buffer)
15001 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15002 (widen)
15003 (goto-char (point-min))
15004 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15005 (setq lengths-list
15006 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15007 (kill-buffer buffer)
15008 lengths-list)))
15009 @end group
15010 @end smallexample
15011
15012 @noindent
15013 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15014 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15015 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15016 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15017 message.
15018
15019 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15020 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15021 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15022 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15023
15024 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15025 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15026 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15027 variable.
15028
15029 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15030
15031 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15032 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15033 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15034 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15035 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15036 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15037 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15038 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15039 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15040 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15041
15042 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15043 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15044 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15045 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15046 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15047 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15048 won't.
15049
15050 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15051 beginning of the buffer.
15052
15053 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15054 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15055 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15056
15057 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15058 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15059 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15060 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15061 of the files.
15062
15063 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15064 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15065 the whole function.
15066
15067 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15068 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15069 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15070
15071 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15072 @smallexample
15073 (lengths-list-file
15074 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15075 @end smallexample
15076
15077 @noindent
15078 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15079 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15080 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15081
15082 @need 1200
15083 @noindent
15084 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15085 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15086
15087 @smallexample
15088 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15089 @end smallexample
15090
15091 @noindent
15092 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15093 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15094
15095 @need 1200
15096 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15097 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15098
15099 @smallexample
15100 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15101 @end smallexample
15102
15103 @need 1500
15104 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15105 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15106
15107 @smallexample
15108 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15109 @end smallexample
15110
15111 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15112 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15113
15114 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15115 the list.
15116
15117 @node Several files
15118 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15119
15120 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15121 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15122 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15123 a list of files.
15124
15125 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15126 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15127
15128 @menu
15129 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15130 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15131 @end menu
15132
15133 @ifnottex
15134 @node lengths-list-many-files
15135 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15136 @end ifnottex
15137
15138 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15139 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15140 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15141 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15142 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15143 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15144 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15145 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15146 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15147
15148 @need 800
15149 The template looks like this:
15150
15151 @smallexample
15152 @group
15153 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15154 @var{body}@dots{}
15155 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15156 @end group
15157 @end smallexample
15158
15159 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15160 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15161 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15162 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15163 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15164 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15165 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15166 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15167 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15168 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15169
15170 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15171 @need 1250
15172 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15173
15174 @smallexample
15175 @group
15176 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15177 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15178 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15179 @end group
15180 @group
15181 (let (lengths-list)
15182
15183 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15184 (while list-of-files
15185 (setq lengths-list
15186 (append
15187 lengths-list
15188
15189 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15190 (lengths-list-file
15191 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15192 @end group
15193
15194 @group
15195 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15196 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15197
15198 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15199 lengths-list))
15200 @end group
15201 @end smallexample
15202
15203 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15204 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15205 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15206
15207 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15208 @need 1500
15209 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15210 Emacs is visiting the
15211 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15212
15213 @smallexample
15214 debug.el
15215 @end smallexample
15216
15217 @need 800
15218 @noindent
15219 becomes
15220
15221 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15222 @smallexample
15223 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15224 @end smallexample
15225
15226 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15227 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15228 itself.
15229
15230 @node append
15231 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15232
15233 @need 800
15234 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15235
15236 @smallexample
15237 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15238 @end smallexample
15239
15240 @need 800
15241 @noindent
15242 produces the list
15243
15244 @smallexample
15245 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15246 @end smallexample
15247
15248 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15249 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15250 @code{cons},
15251
15252 @smallexample
15253 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15254 @end smallexample
15255
15256 @need 1250
15257 @noindent
15258 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15259 becomes the first element of the new list:
15260
15261 @smallexample
15262 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15263 @end smallexample
15264
15265 @node Several files recursively
15266 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15267
15268 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15269 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15270 is short and simple.
15271
15272 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15273 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15274 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15275 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15276 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15277 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15278 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15279 function is shorter than this description!
15280 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15281
15282 @smallexample
15283 @group
15284 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15285 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15286 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15287 (append
15288 (lengths-list-file
15289 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15290 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15291 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15292 @end group
15293 @end smallexample
15294
15295 @noindent
15296 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15297 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15298 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15299
15300 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15301 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15302 individually.
15303
15304 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15305 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15306 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15307 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15308 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15309 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15310
15311 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15312 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15313 Emacs may produce different results.)
15314
15315 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15316 @smallexample
15317 @group
15318 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15319
15320 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15321 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15322 @end group
15323
15324 @group
15325 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15326 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15327 @end group
15328
15329 @group
15330 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15331 @result{} (85 181)
15332 @end group
15333
15334 @group
15335 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15336 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15337 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15338 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15339 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15340 @end group
15341 @end smallexample
15342
15343 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15344 output we want.
15345
15346 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15347
15348 @node Prepare the data
15349 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15350
15351 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15352 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15353 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15354 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15355 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15356 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15357 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15358
15359 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15360 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15361 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15362 numbers.
15363
15364 @menu
15365 * Data for Display in Detail::
15366 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15367 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15368 * Counting function definitions::
15369 @end menu
15370
15371 @ifnottex
15372 @node Data for Display in Detail
15373 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15374 @end ifnottex
15375
15376 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15377 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15378 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15379 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15380
15381 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15382 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15383 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15384 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15385 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15386 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15387 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15388 that we will need.
15389
15390 @node Sorting
15391 @subsection Sorting Lists
15392 @findex sort
15393
15394 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15395 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15396 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15397 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15398
15399 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15400 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15401 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15402 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15403 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15404 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15405 alphabetize a list.
15406
15407 @need 1250
15408 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15409
15410 @smallexample
15411 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15412 @end smallexample
15413
15414 @need 800
15415 @noindent
15416 produces this:
15417
15418 @smallexample
15419 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15420 @end smallexample
15421
15422 @noindent
15423 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15424 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15425 arguments.)
15426
15427 Sorting the list returned by the
15428 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15429 it uses the @code{<} function:
15430
15431 @ignore
15432 2006 Oct 29
15433 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15434 (progn
15435 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15436 (sort
15437 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15438 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15439 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15440 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15441 '<))
15442
15443 @end ignore
15444
15445 @smallexample
15446 @group
15447 (sort
15448 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15449 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15450 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15451 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15452 '<)
15453 @end group
15454 @end smallexample
15455
15456 @need 800
15457 @noindent
15458 which produces:
15459
15460 @smallexample
15461 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15462 @end smallexample
15463
15464 @noindent
15465 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15466 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15467 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15468
15469 @node Files List
15470 @subsection Making a List of Files
15471
15472 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15473 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15474 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15475 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15476 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15477 recursive call.
15478
15479 @findex directory-files
15480 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15481 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15482 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15483 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15484 pattern within a single directory.
15485
15486 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15487 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15488 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15489 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15490 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15491 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15492
15493 @findex files-in-below-directory
15494 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15495 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15496 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15497 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15498 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15499 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15500
15501 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15502 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15503 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15504
15505 @smallexample
15506 @group
15507 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15508 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15509 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15510 @end group
15511 @end smallexample
15512
15513 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15514 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15515 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15516 file---which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15517 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15518 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15519 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15520
15521 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15522 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15523 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15524 directory or a symbolic link.
15525
15526 @need 1000
15527 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15528 its attributes:
15529
15530 @smallexample
15531 @group
15532 ("abbrev.el"
15533 nil
15534 1
15535 1000
15536 100
15537 @end group
15538 @group
15539 (20615 27034 579989 697000)
15540 (17905 55681 0 0)
15541 (20615 26327 734791 805000)
15542 13188
15543 "-rw-r--r--"
15544 @end group
15545 @group
15546 t
15547 2971624
15548 773)
15549 @end group
15550 @end smallexample
15551
15552 @need 1200
15553 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15554 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15555
15556 @smallexample
15557 @group
15558 ("mail"
15559 t
15560 @dots{}
15561 )
15562 @end group
15563 @end smallexample
15564
15565 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15566 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15567 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15568 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15569
15570 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15571 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15572 any directories below that directory.
15573
15574 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15575 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15576 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15577 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15578 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15579
15580 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15581 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15582 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15583 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15584 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15585 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15586 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15587 directory.
15588
15589 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15590 several tasks:
15591
15592 @itemize @bullet
15593 @item
15594 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15595 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15596
15597 @item
15598 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15599 directory; and if so,
15600
15601 @itemize @minus
15602 @item
15603 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15604 so skip it.
15605
15606 @item
15607 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15608 @end itemize
15609 @end itemize
15610
15611 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15612 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15613 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15614 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15615 pattern is `accumulate'
15616 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15617 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15618
15619 @ignore
15620 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15621 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15622
15623 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15624 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15625 @end ignore
15626
15627 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15628
15629 @need 800
15630 Here is the function:
15631
15632 @smallexample
15633 @group
15634 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15635 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15636 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15637 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15638 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15639 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15640 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15641 @end group
15642 @group
15643 (let (el-files-list
15644 (current-directory-list
15645 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15646 ;; while we are in the current directory
15647 (while current-directory-list
15648 @end group
15649 @group
15650 (cond
15651 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15652 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15653 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15654 (setq el-files-list
15655 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15656 @end group
15657 @group
15658 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15659 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15660 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15661 (if
15662 (equal "."
15663 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15664 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15665 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15666 ()
15667 @end group
15668 @group
15669 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15670 (setq el-files-list
15671 (append
15672 (files-in-below-directory
15673 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15674 el-files-list)))))
15675 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15676 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15677 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15678 ;; return the filenames
15679 el-files-list))
15680 @end group
15681 @end smallexample
15682
15683 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15684 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15685
15686 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15687 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15688
15689 @need 1250
15690 Thus, on my system,
15691
15692 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15693
15694 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15695 @smallexample
15696 @group
15697 (length
15698 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15699 @end group
15700 @end smallexample
15701
15702 @noindent
15703 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15704 @samp{.el} files.
15705
15706 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15707 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15708 like this:
15709
15710 @smallexample
15711 @group
15712 (sort
15713 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15714 'string-lessp)
15715 @end group
15716 @end smallexample
15717
15718 @ignore
15719 (defun test ()
15720 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15721 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15722 (sit-for 0)
15723 (sort
15724 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15725 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15726 '<)
15727 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15728 @end ignore
15729
15730 @node Counting function definitions
15731 @subsection Counting function definitions
15732
15733 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15734 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15735 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15736 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15737
15738 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
15739 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
15740 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
15741 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
15742 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
15743 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
15744 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
15745
15746 @need 1200
15747 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
15748 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
15749 @vindex top-of-ranges
15750
15751 @smallexample
15752 @group
15753 (defvar top-of-ranges
15754 '(10 20 30 40 50
15755 60 70 80 90 100
15756 110 120 130 140 150
15757 160 170 180 190 200
15758 210 220 230 240 250
15759 260 270 280 290 300)
15760 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
15761 @end group
15762 @end smallexample
15763
15764 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
15765
15766 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
15767 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
15768 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
15769 as arguments.
15770
15771 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
15772 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
15773 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
15774 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
15775 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
15776 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
15777 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
15778 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
15779 top-of-range values in turn.
15780
15781 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
15782 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
15783 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
15784 small gear inside a big gear.
15785
15786 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
15787 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
15788 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
15789 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
15790 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
15791 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
15792 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
15793
15794 @need 1250
15795 The inner loop looks like this:
15796
15797 @smallexample
15798 @group
15799 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15800 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15801 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15802 @end group
15803 @end smallexample
15804
15805 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
15806 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
15807 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
15808
15809 @smallexample
15810 @group
15811 (while top-of-ranges
15812 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
15813 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15814 @end group
15815 @end smallexample
15816
15817 @need 1200
15818 Put together, the two loops look like this:
15819
15820 @smallexample
15821 @group
15822 (while top-of-ranges
15823
15824 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
15825 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15826 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15827 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15828
15829 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15830 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15831 @end group
15832 @end smallexample
15833
15834 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
15835 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
15836 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
15837 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
15838
15839 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
15840 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
15841 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
15842 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
15843 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
15844 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
15845 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
15846 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
15847 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
15848 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
15849 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
15850 @findex nreverse
15851
15852 @need 800
15853 For example,
15854
15855 @smallexample
15856 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
15857 @end smallexample
15858
15859 @need 800
15860 @noindent
15861 produces:
15862
15863 @smallexample
15864 (4 3 2 1)
15865 @end smallexample
15866
15867 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
15868 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
15869 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
15870 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
15871 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
15872 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
15873 as is.)
15874 @findex reverse
15875
15876 @need 1250
15877 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
15878
15879 @smallexample
15880 @group
15881 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
15882 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
15883 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
15884 (number-within-range 0)
15885 defuns-per-range-list)
15886 @end group
15887
15888 @group
15889 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
15890 (while top-of-ranges
15891 @end group
15892
15893 @group
15894 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
15895 (while (and
15896 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
15897 (car sorted-lengths)
15898 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15899 @end group
15900
15901 @group
15902 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
15903 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15904 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15905
15906 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
15907 @end group
15908
15909 @group
15910 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15911 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
15912 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
15913 @end group
15914
15915 @group
15916 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15917 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
15918 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
15919 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
15920 @end group
15921
15922 @group
15923 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
15924 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
15925 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15926 (cons
15927 (length sorted-lengths)
15928 defuns-per-range-list))
15929 @end group
15930
15931 @group
15932 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
15933 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
15934 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
15935 @end group
15936 @end smallexample
15937
15938 @need 1200
15939 @noindent
15940 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
15941 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
15942
15943 @smallexample
15944 @group
15945 (and (car sorted-lengths)
15946 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15947 @end group
15948 @end smallexample
15949
15950 @need 800
15951 @noindent
15952 instead of like this:
15953
15954 @smallexample
15955 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
15956 @end smallexample
15957
15958 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
15959 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
15960 range.
15961
15962 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
15963 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
15964 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
15965 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
15966 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
15967 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
15968
15969 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
15970 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
15971 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
15972 the test will fail.
15973
15974 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15975 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
15976 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
15977 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
15978 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
15979 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
15980 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
15981 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15982 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
15983 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
15984 of the @code{and} expression.
15985
15986 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
15987 This way, we avoid an error.
15988 @iftex
15989 @noindent
15990 (For information about @code{and}, see
15991 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
15992 @end iftex
15993 @ifinfo
15994 @noindent
15995 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
15996 information about @code{and}.)
15997 @end ifinfo
15998
15999 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16000 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16001 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16002 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16003 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16004
16005 @smallexample
16006 @group
16007 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16008 (setq top-of-ranges
16009 '(110 120 130 140 150
16010 160 170 180 190 200))
16011
16012 (setq sorted-lengths
16013 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16014
16015 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16016 @end group
16017 @end smallexample
16018
16019 @need 800
16020 @noindent
16021 The list returned looks like this:
16022
16023 @smallexample
16024 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16025 @end smallexample
16026
16027 @noindent
16028 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16029 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16030 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16031 of 200 or larger.
16032
16033 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16034 @node Readying a Graph
16035 @chapter Readying a Graph
16036 @cindex Readying a graph
16037 @cindex Graph prototype
16038 @cindex Prototype graph
16039 @cindex Body of graph
16040
16041 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16042 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16043
16044 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16045 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16046 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16047 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16048 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16049 more.
16050
16051 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16052 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16053 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16054 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16055 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16056 the function to label the axes automatically.
16057
16058 @menu
16059 * Columns of a graph::
16060 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16061 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16062 * Printed Axes::
16063 * Line Graph Exercise::
16064 @end menu
16065
16066 @ifnottex
16067 @node Columns of a graph
16068 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16069 @end ifnottex
16070
16071 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16072 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16073 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16074 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16075 symbol a user option.
16076
16077 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16078 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16079 label the graph, but only print its body.
16080
16081 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16082 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16083 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16084 @code{numbers-list}.
16085
16086 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16087 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16088
16089 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16090 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16091 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16092 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16093
16094 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16095 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16096 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16097 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16098 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16099 @findex apropos
16100
16101 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16102 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16103 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16104 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16105 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16106 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16107 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16108 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16109 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16110 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16111
16112 @need 1200
16113 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16114
16115 @smallexample
16116 @group
16117 insert-rectangle:
16118 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16119 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16120 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16121 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16122 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16123 and point is at the lower right corner.
16124 @end group
16125 @end smallexample
16126
16127 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16128
16129 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16130 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16131 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16132 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16133 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16134
16135 @smallexample
16136 @group
16137 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16138 second
16139 thirdnil
16140 @end group
16141 @end smallexample
16142
16143 @noindent
16144 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16145 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16146 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16147 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16148 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16149 column of strings.
16150
16151 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16152 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16153 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16154 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16155 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16156 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16157 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16158 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16159 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16160 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16161
16162 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16163 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16164 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16165 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16166 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16167 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16168
16169 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16170 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16171 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16172 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16173 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16174 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16175 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16176 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16177
16178 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16179 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16180 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16181 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16182 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16183 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16184 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16185 be difficult.
16186
16187 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16188 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16189 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16190 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16191 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16192 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16193 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16194 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16195
16196 @smallexample
16197 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16198 @end smallexample
16199
16200 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16201 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16202 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16203 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16204 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16205 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16206 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16207 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16208 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16209 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16210 example,
16211
16212 @smallexample
16213 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16214 @end smallexample
16215
16216 @noindent
16217 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16218 smallest of all its arguments.)
16219 @findex max
16220 @findex min
16221
16222 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16223 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16224 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16225
16226 @smallexample
16227 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16228 @end smallexample
16229
16230 @need 800
16231 @noindent
16232 produces the following error message;
16233
16234 @smallexample
16235 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16236 @end smallexample
16237
16238 @findex apply
16239 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16240 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16241 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16242 may be a list.
16243
16244 @need 1250
16245 For example,
16246
16247 @smallexample
16248 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16249 @end smallexample
16250
16251 @noindent
16252 returns 8.
16253
16254 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16255 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16256 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16257 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16258 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16259 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16260 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16261 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16262 it.)
16263
16264 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16265 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16266 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16267
16268 @smallexample
16269 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16270 @end smallexample
16271
16272 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16273 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16274 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16275 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16276 sorted or not.)
16277
16278 @need 800
16279 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16280
16281 @smallexample
16282 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16283 @end smallexample
16284
16285 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16286 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16287 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16288 function should return a list of strings for the
16289 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16290
16291 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16292 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16293 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16294 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16295 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16296 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16297
16298 @smallexample
16299 @group
16300 ;;; @r{First version.}
16301 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16302 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16303 (let ((insert-list nil)
16304 (number-of-top-blanks
16305 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16306 @end group
16307
16308 @group
16309 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16310 (while (> actual-height 0)
16311 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16312 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16313 @end group
16314
16315 @group
16316 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16317 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16318 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16319 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16320 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16321 @end group
16322
16323 @group
16324 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16325 insert-list))
16326 @end group
16327 @end smallexample
16328
16329 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16330 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16331
16332 @smallexample
16333 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16334 @end smallexample
16335
16336 @need 800
16337 @noindent
16338 returns
16339
16340 @smallexample
16341 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16342 @end smallexample
16343
16344 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16345 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16346 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16347 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16348 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16349 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16350 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16351 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16352 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16353 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16354 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16355 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16356 those variables separately.
16357
16358 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16359 lead us to the second version of the function:
16360
16361 @smallexample
16362 @group
16363 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16364 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16365 @end group
16366
16367 @group
16368 (defvar graph-blank " "
16369 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16370 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16371 as graph-symbol.")
16372 @end group
16373 @end smallexample
16374
16375 @noindent
16376 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16377 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16378
16379 @smallexample
16380 @group
16381 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16382 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16383 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16384
16385 @end group
16386 @group
16387 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16388 of the list.
16389 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16390 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16391 @end group
16392
16393 @group
16394 (let ((insert-list nil)
16395 (number-of-top-blanks
16396 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16397 @end group
16398
16399 @group
16400 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16401 (while (> actual-height 0)
16402 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16403 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16404 @end group
16405
16406 @group
16407 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16408 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16409 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16410 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16411 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16412
16413 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16414 insert-list))
16415 @end group
16416 @end smallexample
16417
16418 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16419 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16420 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16421 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16422 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16423 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16424 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16425 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16426 the list.
16427
16428 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16429 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16430 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16431 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16432 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16433 simple.
16434
16435 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16436 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16437 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16438
16439 @node graph-body-print
16440 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16441 @findex graph-body-print
16442
16443 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16444 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16445 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16446 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16447 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16448 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16449 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16450
16451 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16452 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16453
16454 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16455 version of this function:
16456
16457 @smallexample
16458 @group
16459 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16460 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16461 (let ((height @dots{}
16462 @dots{}))
16463 @end group
16464
16465 @group
16466 (while numbers-list
16467 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16468 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16469 @end group
16470 @end smallexample
16471
16472 @noindent
16473 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16474
16475 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16476 determine the height of the graph.
16477
16478 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16479 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16480 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16481 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16482
16483 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16484 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16485 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16486 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16487 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16488 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16489 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16490
16491 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16492 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16493 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16494 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16495 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16496 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16497 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16498 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16499 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16500
16501 @need 1250
16502 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16503
16504 @smallexample
16505 @group
16506 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16507 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16508 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16509
16510 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16511 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16512 from-position)
16513 @end group
16514
16515 @group
16516 (while numbers-list
16517 (setq from-position (point))
16518 (insert-rectangle
16519 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16520 (goto-char from-position)
16521 (forward-char symbol-width)
16522 @end group
16523 @group
16524 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16525 (sit-for 0)
16526 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16527 @end group
16528 @group
16529 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16530 (forward-line height)
16531 (insert "\n")
16532 ))
16533 @end group
16534 @end smallexample
16535
16536 @noindent
16537 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16538 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16539 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16540 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16541 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16542 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16543 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16544 function exits.
16545
16546 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16547
16548 @enumerate
16549 @item
16550 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16551 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16552 @iftex
16553 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16554 @end iftex
16555 @ifinfo
16556 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16557 @end ifinfo
16558 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16559
16560 @need 800
16561 @item
16562 Copy the following expression:
16563
16564 @smallexample
16565 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16566 @end smallexample
16567
16568 @item
16569 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16570 want the graph to start.
16571
16572 @item
16573 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16574
16575 @item
16576 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16577 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16578
16579 @item
16580 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16581 @end enumerate
16582
16583 @need 800
16584 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16585
16586 @smallexample
16587 @group
16588 *
16589 * **
16590 * ****
16591 *** ****
16592 ********* *
16593 ************
16594 *************
16595 @end group
16596 @end smallexample
16597
16598 @node recursive-graph-body-print
16599 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16600 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16601
16602 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16603 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16604 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16605 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16606 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16607 the graph.
16608
16609 @need 1250
16610 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16611
16612 @smallexample
16613 @group
16614 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16615 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16616 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16617 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16618 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16619 from-position)
16620 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16621 numbers-list
16622 height
16623 symbol-width)))
16624 @end group
16625 @end smallexample
16626
16627 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16628 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16629 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16630 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16631 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16632 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16633 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16634 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16635 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16636
16637 @smallexample
16638 @group
16639 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16640 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16641 "Print a bar graph.
16642 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16643 @end group
16644
16645 @group
16646 (when numbers-list
16647 (setq from-position (point))
16648 (insert-rectangle
16649 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16650 @end group
16651 @group
16652 (goto-char from-position)
16653 (forward-char symbol-width)
16654 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16655 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16656 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16657 @end group
16658 @end smallexample
16659
16660 @need 1250
16661 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16662
16663 @smallexample
16664 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16665 @end smallexample
16666
16667 @need 800
16668 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16669
16670 @smallexample
16671 @group
16672 *
16673 ** *
16674 **** *
16675 **** ***
16676 * *********
16677 ************
16678 *************
16679 @end group
16680 @end smallexample
16681
16682 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16683 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16684
16685 @node Printed Axes
16686 @section Need for Printed Axes
16687
16688 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16689 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16690 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16691
16692 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16693 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16694 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16695 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16696 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16697
16698 @node Line Graph Exercise
16699 @section Exercise
16700
16701 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16702
16703 @node Emacs Initialization
16704 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16705 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16706 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16707 @cindex Initialization file
16708
16709 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---this seemingly
16710 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16711 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16712 it to suit themselves.
16713
16714 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16715 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16716
16717 @menu
16718 * Default Configuration::
16719 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16720 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16721 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
16722 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16723 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16724 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16725 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16726 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16727 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16728 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16729 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16730 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16731 * Miscellaneous::
16732 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16733 @end menu
16734
16735 @ifnottex
16736 @node Default Configuration
16737 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
16738 @end ifnottex
16739
16740 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
16741 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
16742 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
16743 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
16744 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
16745 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
16746 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
16747 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
16748 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
16749 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
16750
16751 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
16752 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
16753
16754 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
16755 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
16756 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
16757
16758 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
16759 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
16760 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
16761 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
16762 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
16763 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
16764 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
16765 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
16766
16767 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
16768 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
16769 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
16770 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
16771
16772 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
16773 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
16774 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
16775
16776 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
16777 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
16778 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
16779 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
16780 Manual}.
16781
16782 @node Site-wide Init
16783 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
16784
16785 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
16786 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
16787 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
16788 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
16789 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
16790 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
16791 everyone.
16792
16793 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
16794 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
16795 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
16796 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
16797 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
16798 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
16799 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
16800 @file{INSTALL} file.)
16801
16802 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
16803 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
16804 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
16805 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
16806 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
16807
16808 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
16809 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
16810 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
16811 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
16812 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
16813 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
16814 Simple Extension}.)
16815
16816 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
16817 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
16818 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
16819
16820 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
16821 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
16822 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
16823
16824 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
16825 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
16826 initialization file.
16827
16828 @node defcustom
16829 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
16830 @findex defcustom
16831
16832 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
16833 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
16834 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
16835 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
16836 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
16837 file.)
16838
16839 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} macro.
16840 Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables that
16841 users set, the @code{defcustom} macro is designed for the job.
16842
16843 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
16844 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
16845 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
16846 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
16847 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
16848 documentation.
16849
16850 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
16851 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
16852 arguments are optional.)
16853
16854 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
16855 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
16856
16857 @need 1250
16858 For example, the customizable user option variable
16859 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
16860
16861 @smallexample
16862 @group
16863 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
16864 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
16865 :type 'hook
16866 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
16867 :group 'wp)
16868 @end group
16869 @end smallexample
16870
16871 @noindent
16872 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
16873 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
16874
16875 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
16876 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
16877 Customization buffer.
16878
16879 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
16880 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
16881 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
16882 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
16883 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
16884 user.
16885
16886 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
16887 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
16888 find it.
16889
16890 The @code{defcustom} macro recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
16891 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
16892 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
16893
16894 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
16895
16896 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
16897 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
16898
16899 @need 800
16900 Using the customization command, you can type:
16901
16902 @smallexample
16903 M-x customize
16904 @end smallexample
16905
16906 @noindent
16907 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
16908 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
16909 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
16910 values. After you click on the button to
16911
16912 @smallexample
16913 Save for Future Sessions
16914 @end smallexample
16915
16916 @noindent
16917 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
16918 It will look like this:
16919
16920 @smallexample
16921 @group
16922 (custom-set-variables
16923 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
16924 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
16925 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
16926 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
16927 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
16928 @end group
16929 @end smallexample
16930
16931 @noindent
16932 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
16933 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
16934 It comes on automatically.)
16935
16936 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
16937 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
16938 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
16939 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
16940 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
16941 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
16942
16943 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
16944 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
16945 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
16946 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
16947 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
16948
16949 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
16950 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
16951 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
16952
16953 @need 800
16954 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
16955 message that says
16956
16957 @smallexample
16958 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
16959 @end smallexample
16960
16961 @need 800
16962 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
16963
16964 @smallexample
16965 Save for Future Sessions
16966 @end smallexample
16967
16968 @noindent
16969 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
16970 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
16971 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
16972 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
16973 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
16974 forget, you may confuse yourself.
16975
16976 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
16977 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
16978 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
16979
16980 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
16981 expressions myself.
16982
16983 @findex defsubst
16984 @findex defconst
16985 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
16986 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
16987 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
16988 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
16989 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
16990 variable; but please do not.)
16991
16992 @node Beginning a .emacs File
16993 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
16994 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
16995
16996 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
16997 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
16998 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
16999
17000 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17001 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17002 definitions.
17003
17004 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17005 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17006
17007 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17008 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17009
17010 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17011 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17012 not.
17013
17014 @need 1200
17015 @smallexample
17016 @group
17017 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17018 ; Robert J. Chassell
17019 ; 26 September 1985
17020 @end group
17021 @end smallexample
17022
17023 @noindent
17024 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17025 adding to it ever since.
17026
17027 @smallexample
17028 @group
17029 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17030 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17031 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17032 ; three semicolons.
17033 @end group
17034 @end smallexample
17035
17036 @noindent
17037 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17038 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17039 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17040 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17041 more about comments.)
17042
17043 @smallexample
17044 @group
17045 ;;;; The Help Key
17046 ; Control-h is the help key;
17047 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17048 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17049 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17050 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17051 @end group
17052 @end smallexample
17053
17054 @noindent
17055 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17056
17057 @smallexample
17058 @group
17059 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17060 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17061 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17062 ; control-h m.
17063 @end group
17064 @end smallexample
17065
17066 @noindent
17067 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17068 all you need to know.
17069
17070 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17071 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17072 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17073 remember to look here to remind myself.
17074
17075 @node Text and Auto-fill
17076 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17077
17078 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17079 Auto Fill mode.
17080
17081 @smallexample
17082 @group
17083 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17084 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17085 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17086 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17087 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17088 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17089 @end group
17090 @end smallexample
17091
17092 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17093 besides remind a forgetful human!
17094
17095 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17096 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17097 other mode, such as C mode.
17098
17099 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17100 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17101 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17102 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17103 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17104 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17105 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17106 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17107 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17108 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17109 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17110 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17111
17112 @ifinfo
17113 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17114 Emacs Manual}.
17115
17116 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17117 Manual}.
17118 @end ifinfo
17119 @iftex
17120 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17121 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17122 @end iftex
17123
17124 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17125
17126 @need 800
17127 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17128
17129 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17130 @smallexample
17131 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17132 @end smallexample
17133
17134 @noindent
17135 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17136
17137 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17138 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17139 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17140 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17141 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17142 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17143 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17144 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17145 anywhere else in Emacs.
17146
17147 @need 800
17148 Here is the next line:
17149
17150 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17151 @findex add-hook
17152 @smallexample
17153 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17154 @end smallexample
17155
17156 @noindent
17157 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17158 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17159
17160 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17161 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17162
17163 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17164 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17165 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17166
17167 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17168 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17169 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17170
17171 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17172 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17173 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17174 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17175 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17176 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17177
17178 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17179 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17180 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17181 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17182
17183 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17184 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17185 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17186 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17187 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17188
17189 @need 1250
17190 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17191 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17192
17193 @smallexample
17194 (setq colon-double-space t)
17195 @end smallexample
17196
17197 @node Mail Aliases
17198 @section Mail Aliases
17199
17200 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17201 reminders.
17202
17203 @smallexample
17204 @group
17205 ;;; Mail mode
17206 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17207 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17208 ; type `M-x rmail'
17209 (setq mail-aliases t)
17210 @end group
17211 @end smallexample
17212
17213 @cindex Mail aliases
17214 @noindent
17215 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17216 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17217 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17218
17219 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17220 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17221 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17222
17223 @smallexample
17224 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17225 @end smallexample
17226
17227 @noindent
17228 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17229 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17230
17231 @node Indent Tabs Mode
17232 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17233 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17234 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17235
17236 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17237 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17238 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17239 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17240 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17241
17242 @need 1250
17243 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17244
17245 @smallexample
17246 @group
17247 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17248 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17249 @end group
17250 @end smallexample
17251
17252 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17253 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17254 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17255 values for the variable.
17256
17257 @ifinfo
17258 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17259
17260 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17261 Manual}.
17262 @end ifinfo
17263 @iftex
17264 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17265 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17266 @end iftex
17267
17268 @need 1700
17269 @node Keybindings
17270 @section Some Keybindings
17271
17272 Now for some personal keybindings:
17273
17274 @smallexample
17275 @group
17276 ;;; Compare windows
17277 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17278 @end group
17279 @end smallexample
17280
17281 @findex compare-windows
17282 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17283 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17284 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17285 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17286
17287 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17288
17289 @cindex Setting a key globally
17290 @cindex Global set key
17291 @cindex Key setting globally
17292 @findex global-set-key
17293 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17294 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17295 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17296 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17297 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17298 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17299 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17300 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17301 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17302 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17303 details.)
17304
17305 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17306 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17307 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17308
17309 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17310 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17311 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17312 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17313 adapt what is there.
17314
17315 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17316 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17317 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17318 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17319 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17320 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17321 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17322 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17323 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17324
17325 @need 1250
17326 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17327
17328 @smallexample
17329 @group
17330 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17331 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17332 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17333 @end group
17334 @end smallexample
17335
17336 @findex occur
17337 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17338 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17339 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17340 to jump to occurrences.
17341
17342 @findex global-unset-key
17343 @cindex Unbinding key
17344 @cindex Key unbinding
17345 @need 1250
17346 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17347 work:
17348
17349 @smallexample
17350 @group
17351 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17352 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17353 @end group
17354 @end smallexample
17355
17356 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17357 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17358 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17359 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17360 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17361
17362 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17363 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17364 @need 1250
17365 The following rebinds an existing key:
17366
17367 @smallexample
17368 @group
17369 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17370 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17371 @end group
17372 @end smallexample
17373
17374 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17375 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17376 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17377 almost always want to do something in that
17378 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17379 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17380 but moves point into that window.
17381
17382 @node Keymaps
17383 @section Keymaps
17384 @cindex Keymaps
17385 @cindex Rebinding keys
17386
17387 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17388 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17389 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17390 @code{current-global-map}.
17391
17392 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17393 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17394 all buffers.
17395
17396 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17397 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17398 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17399
17400 @smallexample
17401 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17402 @end smallexample
17403
17404 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17405 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17406 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17407 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17408 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17409
17410 @smallexample
17411 @group
17412 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17413 @end group
17414 @end smallexample
17415
17416 @noindent
17417 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17418 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17419 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17420 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17421 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17422 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17423 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17424
17425 @need 1250
17426 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17427
17428 @smallexample
17429 @group
17430 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17431 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17432 (interactive)
17433 (beginning-of-line)
17434 (insert "@@group\n"))
17435 @end group
17436 @end smallexample
17437
17438 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17439 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17440 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17441
17442 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17443 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17444 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17445
17446 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17447 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17448 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17449
17450 @node Loading Files
17451 @section Loading Files
17452 @cindex Loading files
17453 @c findex load
17454
17455 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17456 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17457 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17458 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17459
17460 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17461 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17462 For example:
17463
17464 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17465
17466 @smallexample
17467 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17468 @end smallexample
17469
17470 This evaluates, i.e., loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17471 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17472 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17473 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17474 1989.
17475
17476 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17477 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17478 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17479 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17480 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17481 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17482 window.
17483
17484 @need 1250
17485 To replace the key binding for the default
17486 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17487 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17488
17489 @smallexample
17490 @group
17491 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17492 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17493 @end group
17494 @end smallexample
17495
17496 @vindex load-path
17497 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17498 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17499 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17500 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17501 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17502 when Emacs is built.)
17503
17504 @need 1250
17505 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17506 existing load path:
17507
17508 @smallexample
17509 @group
17510 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17511 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17512 @end group
17513 @end smallexample
17514
17515 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17516 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17517
17518 @findex load-library
17519 @smallexample
17520 @group
17521 (defun load-library (library)
17522 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17523 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17524 (interactive
17525 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17526 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17527 load-path
17528 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17529 (load library))
17530 @end group
17531 @end smallexample
17532
17533 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17534 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17535 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17536
17537 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17538 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17539 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17540 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17541
17542 @node Autoload
17543 @section Autoloading
17544 @findex autoload
17545
17546 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17547 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17548 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17549 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17550
17551 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17552 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17553
17554 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17555 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17556 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17557
17558 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17559 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17560 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17561 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17562 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17563 @file{.emacs} file.
17564
17565 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17566 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17567 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17568 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17569 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17570 dumping.)
17571
17572 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17573 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17574 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17575 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17576 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17577 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17578 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17579 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17580 function (the default is a function).
17581
17582 @need 800
17583 Here is a typical example:
17584
17585 @smallexample
17586 @group
17587 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17588 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17589 @end group
17590 @end smallexample
17591
17592 @noindent
17593 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17594 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17595
17596 @noindent
17597 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17598 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17599 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17600 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17601 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17602 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17603 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17604 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17605 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17606 documentation is not available.)
17607
17608 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17609 Manual}, for more information.
17610
17611 @node Simple Extension
17612 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17613 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17614 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17615
17616 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17617 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17618 to read.
17619
17620 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17621 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17622 @file{.emacs} file.
17623
17624 @need 1250
17625 Here is the definition:
17626
17627 @smallexample
17628 @group
17629 ;;; Line to top of window;
17630 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17631 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17632 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17633 (interactive)
17634 (recenter 0))
17635 @end group
17636 @end smallexample
17637
17638 @need 1250
17639 Now for the keybinding.
17640
17641 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17642 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17643 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17644 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17645
17646 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17647 this:
17648
17649 @smallexample
17650 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17651 @end smallexample
17652
17653 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17654 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17655
17656 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17657 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17658 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17659 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17660 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17661 the following conditional:
17662
17663 @smallexample
17664 @group
17665 (cond
17666 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17667 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17668 ( @dots{} ))
17669 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17670 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17671 ( @dots{} )))
17672 @end group
17673 @end smallexample
17674
17675 For example, recent versions blink
17676 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17677 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17678 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17679 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17680
17681 @smallexample
17682 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17683
17684 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17685
17686 emacs -Q -D
17687 @end smallexample
17688 }:
17689
17690 @smallexample
17691 @group
17692 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17693 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17694 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17695 ;; at the end of the buffer
17696 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17697 @end group
17698 @group
17699 ;; Turn on image viewing
17700 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17701 @end group
17702 @group
17703 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17704 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17705 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17706 @end group
17707 @group
17708 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17709 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17710 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17711 @end group
17712 @group
17713 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17714 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17715 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17716 (tooltip-mode nil)
17717 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17718 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17719 )
17720 @end group
17721 @end smallexample
17722
17723 @node X11 Colors
17724 @section X11 Colors
17725
17726 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17727 system.
17728
17729 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17730
17731 @need 1250
17732 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17733 file that set values:
17734
17735 @smallexample
17736 @group
17737 ;; Set cursor color
17738 (set-cursor-color "white")
17739
17740 ;; Set mouse color
17741 (set-mouse-color "white")
17742
17743 ;; Set foreground and background
17744 (set-foreground-color "white")
17745 (set-background-color "darkblue")
17746 @end group
17747
17748 @group
17749 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
17750 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
17751 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
17752 @end group
17753
17754 @group
17755 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
17756 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
17757 @end group
17758
17759 @group
17760 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
17761 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
17762 @end group
17763
17764 @group
17765 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
17766 (setq calendar-load-hook
17767 (lambda ()
17768 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
17769 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
17770 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
17771 @end group
17772 @end smallexample
17773
17774 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
17775 the screen flicker.
17776
17777 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
17778 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
17779 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
17780 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
17781
17782 @smallexample
17783 @group
17784 Emacs*foreground: white
17785 Emacs*background: darkblue
17786 Emacs*cursorColor: white
17787 Emacs*pointerColor: white
17788 @end group
17789 @end smallexample
17790
17791 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
17792 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
17793 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
17794 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
17795
17796 @smallexample
17797 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
17798 @end smallexample
17799
17800 @need 1700
17801 @node Miscellaneous
17802 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
17803
17804 @need 1250
17805 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
17806 @sp 1
17807
17808 @itemize @minus
17809 @item
17810 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
17811
17812 @smallexample
17813 @group
17814 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
17815 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
17816 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
17817 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
17818 @end group
17819
17820 @group
17821 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
17822 "*emacs*mpointer")))
17823 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
17824 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
17825 (if (eq mpointer nil)
17826 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
17827 @end group
17828 @group
17829 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
17830 (set-mouse-color "white"))
17831 @end group
17832 @end smallexample
17833
17834 @item
17835 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
17836 this:
17837
17838 @smallexample
17839 @group
17840 (setq-default
17841 default-frame-alist
17842 '((cursor-color . "white")
17843 (mouse-color . "white")
17844 (foreground-color . "white")
17845 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
17846 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
17847 (cursor-type . box)
17848 @end group
17849 @group
17850 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
17851 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
17852 (width . 80)
17853 (height . 58)
17854 (font .
17855 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
17856 ))
17857 @end group
17858 @end smallexample
17859
17860 @item
17861 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
17862 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
17863 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
17864 problem recently.)
17865
17866 @smallexample
17867 @group
17868 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
17869 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
17870
17871 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
17872 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
17873 @end group
17874 @end smallexample
17875
17876 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
17877
17878 @smallexample
17879 @group
17880 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
17881 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
17882 @end group
17883 @end smallexample
17884
17885 @noindent
17886 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
17887
17888 @need 1250
17889 @item When using `grep'@*
17890 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
17891 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
17892 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
17893 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
17894
17895 @smallexample
17896 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
17897 @end smallexample
17898
17899 @ignore
17900 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
17901
17902 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
17903
17904 smallexample
17905 (load "uncompress")
17906 end smallexample
17907
17908 @end ignore
17909
17910 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
17911 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
17912
17913 @smallexample
17914 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
17915 @end smallexample
17916
17917 @item Set your language environment and default input method
17918
17919 @smallexample
17920 @group
17921 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
17922 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
17923 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
17924 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
17925 @end group
17926 @end smallexample
17927
17928 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
17929
17930 @smallexample
17931 @group
17932 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
17933 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
17934 @end group
17935 @end smallexample
17936 @end itemize
17937
17938 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
17939 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
17940 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
17941
17942 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
17943 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
17944 of the home row.
17945
17946 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
17947 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
17948 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
17949 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
17950 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
17951
17952 @need 1250
17953 @noindent
17954 For a boot script:
17955
17956 @smallexample
17957 @group
17958 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
17959 @exdent or
17960 install-keymap emacs2
17961 @end group
17962 @end smallexample
17963
17964 @need 1250
17965 @noindent
17966 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
17967 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
17968
17969 @smallexample
17970 @group
17971 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
17972 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
17973 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
17974
17975 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
17976 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
17977 @end group
17978 @end smallexample
17979
17980 @need 1250
17981 @noindent
17982 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
17983 key to a @key{META} key:
17984
17985 @smallexample
17986 @group
17987 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
17988 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
17989 @end group
17990 @end smallexample
17991
17992 @need 1700
17993 @node Mode Line
17994 @section A Modified Mode Line
17995 @vindex mode-line-format
17996 @cindex Mode line format
17997
17998 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
17999
18000 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18001 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18002
18003 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18004
18005 @smallexample
18006 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18007 @end smallexample
18008
18009 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18010 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18011 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18012
18013 @need 1200
18014 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18015
18016 @smallexample
18017 @group
18018 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18019 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18020 (setq-default mode-line-format
18021 (quote
18022 (#("-" 0 1
18023 (help-echo
18024 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18025 mode-line-mule-info
18026 mode-line-modified
18027 mode-line-frame-identification
18028 " "
18029 @end group
18030 @group
18031 mode-line-buffer-identification
18032 " "
18033 (:eval (substring
18034 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18035 ":"
18036 default-directory
18037 #(" " 0 1
18038 (help-echo
18039 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18040 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18041 global-mode-string
18042 @end group
18043 @group
18044 #(" %[(" 0 6
18045 (help-echo
18046 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18047 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18048 mode-line-process
18049 minor-mode-alist
18050 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18051 ")%] "
18052 (-3 . "%P")
18053 ;; "-%-"
18054 )))
18055 @end group
18056 @end smallexample
18057
18058 @noindent
18059 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18060 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18061 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18062 it.
18063
18064 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18065 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18066 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18067 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18068 have not discussed.
18069
18070 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18071 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18072 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18073 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18074 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18075 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18076 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18077 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18078
18079 @need 1000
18080 The new string format has a special syntax:
18081
18082 @smallexample
18083 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18084 @end smallexample
18085
18086 @noindent
18087 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18088 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18089 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18090 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18091 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18092 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18093 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18094 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18095 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18096 string format can be repeated.
18097
18098 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18099 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18100 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18101
18102 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18103 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18104 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18105 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18106
18107 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18108 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18109 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18110 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18111 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18112 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18113 window.)
18114
18115 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18116 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18117 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18118 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18119 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18120 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18121
18122 @need 1250
18123 This is the expression:
18124
18125 @smallexample
18126 @group
18127 (:eval (substring
18128 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18129 @end group
18130 @end smallexample
18131
18132 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18133 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18134 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18135 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18136 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18137 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18138 out the line.
18139
18140 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---your own
18141 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18142 keys than a default Emacs.
18143
18144 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18145 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18146
18147 @smallexample
18148 emacs -q
18149 @end smallexample
18150
18151 @noindent
18152 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18153 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18154 more.
18155
18156 @node Debugging
18157 @chapter Debugging
18158 @cindex debugging
18159
18160 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18161 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18162 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18163
18164 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18165 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18166 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18167
18168 @menu
18169 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18170 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18171 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18172 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18173 * Debugging Exercises::
18174 @end menu
18175
18176 @node debug
18177 @section @code{debug}
18178 @findex debug
18179
18180 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18181 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18182 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18183 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18184 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18185
18186 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18187 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18188
18189 @findex triangle-bugged
18190 @smallexample
18191 @group
18192 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18193 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18194 (let ((total 0))
18195 (while (> number 0)
18196 (setq total (+ total number))
18197 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18198 total))
18199 @end group
18200 @end smallexample
18201
18202 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18203 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18204 echo area.
18205
18206 @need 1250
18207 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18208 argument of 4:
18209
18210 @smallexample
18211 (triangle-bugged 4)
18212 @end smallexample
18213
18214 @noindent
18215 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18216 buffer that says:
18217
18218 @noindent
18219 @smallexample
18220 @group
18221 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18222 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18223 (1= number)
18224 (setq number (1= number))
18225 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18226 (setq number (1= number)))
18227 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18228 (setq number ...)) total)
18229 triangle-bugged(4)
18230 @end group
18231 @group
18232 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18233 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18234 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18235 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18236 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18237 @end group
18238 @end smallexample
18239
18240 @noindent
18241 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18242 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18243 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18244
18245 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18246 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18247 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18248
18249 @ignore
18250 @need 800
18251 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18252
18253 @smallexample
18254 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18255 @end smallexample
18256
18257 @noindent
18258 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18259 version 21.
18260 @end ignore
18261
18262 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18263 You can read the complete backtrace.
18264
18265 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18266 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18267 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18268
18269 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18270 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18271 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18272 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18273 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18274
18275 @need 1250
18276 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18277
18278 @smallexample
18279 (setq number (1= number))
18280 @end smallexample
18281
18282 @noindent
18283 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18284 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18285 top:
18286
18287 @smallexample
18288 (1= number)
18289 @end smallexample
18290
18291 @need 1250
18292 @noindent
18293 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18294
18295 @smallexample
18296 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18297 @end smallexample
18298
18299 @noindent
18300 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18301 then run your test again.
18302
18303 @node debug-on-entry
18304 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18305 @findex debug-on-entry
18306
18307 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18308 function has an error.
18309
18310 @ignore
18311 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18312 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18313 manually.
18314 @end ignore
18315
18316 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18317 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18318 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18319
18320 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18321 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18322
18323 @need 1250
18324 @noindent
18325 Type:
18326
18327 @smallexample
18328 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18329 @end smallexample
18330
18331 @need 1250
18332 @noindent
18333 Now, evaluate the following:
18334
18335 @smallexample
18336 (triangle-bugged 5)
18337 @end smallexample
18338
18339 @noindent
18340 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18341 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18342 function:
18343
18344 @smallexample
18345 @group
18346 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18347 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18348 * triangle-bugged(5)
18349 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18350 @end group
18351 @group
18352 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18353 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18354 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18355 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18356 @end group
18357 @end smallexample
18358
18359 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18360 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18361 like this:
18362
18363 @smallexample
18364 @group
18365 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18366 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18367 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18368 (setq number ...)) total)
18369 * triangle-bugged(5)
18370 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18371 @end group
18372 @group
18373 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18374 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18375 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18376 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18377 @end group
18378 @end smallexample
18379
18380 @noindent
18381 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18382 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18383 definition.
18384
18385 @need 1750
18386 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18387
18388 @smallexample
18389 @group
18390 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18391 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18392 * (setq number (1= number))
18393 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18394 (setq number (1= number)))
18395 @group
18396 @end group
18397 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18398 (setq number ...)) total)
18399 * triangle-bugged(5)
18400 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18401 @group
18402 @end group
18403 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18404 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18405 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18406 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18407 @end group
18408 @end smallexample
18409
18410 @need 1500
18411 @noindent
18412 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18413 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18414 like this:
18415
18416 @smallexample
18417 @group
18418 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18419 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18420 * (1= number)
18421 @dots{}
18422 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18423 @end group
18424 @end smallexample
18425
18426 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18427
18428 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18429 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18430
18431 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18432 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18433 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18434
18435 @smallexample
18436 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18437 @end smallexample
18438
18439 @noindent
18440 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18441
18442 @node debug-on-quit
18443 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18444
18445 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18446 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18447
18448 @findex debug-on-quit
18449 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18450 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18451 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18452
18453 @need 1500
18454 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18455 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18456 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18457
18458 @smallexample
18459 @group
18460 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18461 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18462 (let ((total 0))
18463 (while (> number 0)
18464 (setq total (+ total number))
18465 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18466 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18467 total))
18468 @end group
18469 @end smallexample
18470
18471 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18472 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18473
18474 @node edebug
18475 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18476 @cindex Source level debugger
18477 @findex edebug
18478
18479 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18480 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18481 shows which line you are currently executing.
18482
18483 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18484 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18485
18486 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18487 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18488
18489 @need 1250
18490 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18491 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18492 for a review of it.
18493
18494 @smallexample
18495 @group
18496 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18497 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18498 Uses recursion."
18499 (if (= number 1)
18500 1
18501 (+ number
18502 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18503 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18504 @end group
18505 @end smallexample
18506
18507 @noindent
18508 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18509 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18510 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18511 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18512 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18513 Interaction mode.)
18514
18515 @need 1500
18516 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18517 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18518 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18519 and typing
18520
18521 @smallexample
18522 M-x edebug-defun RET
18523 @end smallexample
18524
18525 @noindent
18526 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18527 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18528
18529 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18530 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18531
18532 @smallexample
18533 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18534 @end smallexample
18535
18536 @noindent
18537 You will be jumped back to the source for
18538 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18539 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18540 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18541 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18542 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18543 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18544
18545 @smallexample
18546 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18547 @end smallexample
18548
18549 @noindent
18550 @iftex
18551 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18552 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18553 @end iftex
18554 @ifnottex
18555 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18556 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18557 @end ifnottex
18558
18559 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18560 be executed; the line will look like this:
18561
18562 @smallexample
18563 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18564 @end smallexample
18565
18566 @noindent
18567 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18568 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18569 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18570 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18571
18572 @smallexample
18573 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18574 @end smallexample
18575
18576 @noindent
18577 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18578 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18579 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18580
18581 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18582 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18583
18584 @smallexample
18585 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18586 @end smallexample
18587
18588 @need 1250
18589 @noindent
18590 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18591 that says:
18592
18593 @smallexample
18594 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18595 @end smallexample
18596
18597 @noindent
18598 This is the bug.
18599
18600 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18601
18602 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18603 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18604 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18605 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18606
18607 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18608 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18609 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18610 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18611 times a function is called, and more.
18612
18613 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18614 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18615
18616 @need 1500
18617 @node Debugging Exercises
18618 @section Debugging Exercises
18619
18620 @itemize @bullet
18621 @item
18622 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18623 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18624 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18625 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18626 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18627 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18628 Manual}.)
18629
18630 @item
18631 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18632 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18633 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18634 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18635 completes without problems.
18636
18637 @item
18638 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18639 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.,
18640 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18641 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18642
18643 @item
18644 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18645 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18646 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18647
18648 @item
18649 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18650 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18651
18652 @item
18653 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18654 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18655 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18656
18657 @item
18658 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18659 stopping point.
18660 @end itemize
18661
18662 @node Conclusion
18663 @chapter Conclusion
18664
18665 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18666 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18667 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18668 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18669
18670 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18671 teach yourself.
18672
18673 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18674 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18675 easy to use that we have not touched.
18676
18677 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18678 and in
18679 @ifnotinfo
18680 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18681 @end ifnotinfo
18682 @ifinfo
18683 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18684 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18685 @end ifinfo
18686
18687 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18688 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18689 figure out or find out what it does.
18690
18691 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18692 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18693 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18694 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18695 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18696 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18697
18698 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18699 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18700 the program that takes you to sources.
18701
18702 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18703 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18704 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18705 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18706 function, for example, looks complicated.
18707
18708 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18709 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18710 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18711 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18712 need to read all the functions. According to
18713 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18714 102 words and symbols.
18715
18716 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18717 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18718 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18719
18720 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18721 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18722 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18723
18724 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18725 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18726 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18727
18728 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18729 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18730 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18731 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18732 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18733
18734 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
18735 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
18736 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
18737 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
18738 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
18739 (@code{find-tag}).
18740
18741 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
18742 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
18743 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
18744
18745 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
18746 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
18747 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
18748
18749 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
18750 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
18751 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
18752 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
18753 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
18754
18755 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
18756 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18757
18758 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
18759 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
18760 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
18761 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
18762 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
18763 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
18764 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
18765 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18766 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
18767
18768 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
18769 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
18770 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
18771 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
18772 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
18773 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
18774 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
18775
18776 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
18777 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
18778 beginning.
18779
18780 @c ================ Appendix ================
18781
18782 @node the-the
18783 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
18784 @findex the-the
18785 @cindex Duplicated words function
18786 @cindex Words, duplicated
18787
18788 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
18789 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
18790 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
18791 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
18792
18793 @need 1250
18794 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
18795 search for duplicates:
18796
18797 @smallexample
18798 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
18799 @end smallexample
18800
18801 @noindent
18802 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
18803 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
18804 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
18805 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
18806 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
18807 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
18808 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
18809 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
18810 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
18811
18812 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
18813 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
18814 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
18815
18816 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
18817 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
18818 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
18819 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
18820
18821 @smallexample
18822 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
18823 @end smallexample
18824
18825 @noindent
18826 Again, not useful.
18827
18828 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
18829 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
18830 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
18831 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
18832
18833 @smallexample
18834 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
18835 @end smallexample
18836
18837 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
18838 expression is good enough, so I use it.
18839
18840 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
18841 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
18842
18843 @smallexample
18844 @group
18845 (defun the-the ()
18846 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
18847 (interactive)
18848 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
18849 (push-mark)
18850 @end group
18851 @group
18852 ;; This regexp is not perfect
18853 ;; but is fairly good over all:
18854 (if (re-search-forward
18855 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
18856 (message "Found duplicated word.")
18857 (message "End of buffer")))
18858 @end group
18859
18860 @group
18861 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
18862 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
18863 @end group
18864 @end smallexample
18865
18866 @sp 1
18867 Here is test text:
18868
18869 @smallexample
18870 @group
18871 one two two three four five
18872 five six seven
18873 @end group
18874 @end smallexample
18875
18876 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
18877 function definition and try each of them on this list.
18878
18879 @node Kill Ring
18880 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
18881 @cindex Kill ring handling
18882 @cindex Handling the kill ring
18883 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
18884
18885 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
18886 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
18887 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
18888
18889 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
18890 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
18891 consider the workings of the kill ring.
18892
18893 @menu
18894 * What the Kill Ring Does::
18895 * current-kill::
18896 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
18897 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
18898 * ring file::
18899 @end menu
18900
18901 @ifnottex
18902 @node What the Kill Ring Does
18903 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
18904 @end ifnottex
18905
18906 @need 1250
18907 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
18908 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
18909 evaluate the following:
18910
18911 @smallexample
18912 @group
18913 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
18914 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
18915 @end group
18916 @end smallexample
18917
18918 @noindent
18919 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
18920 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
18921 it with @kbd{M-w}.
18922
18923 @noindent
18924 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
18925 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
18926 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
18927 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
18928 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
18929 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
18930 end you put point or mark.)
18931
18932 @need 1250
18933 @noindent
18934 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
18935 fill the kill ring:
18936
18937 @smallexample
18938 @group
18939 first some text
18940 second piece of text
18941 third line
18942 fourth line of text
18943 fifth bit of text
18944 @end group
18945 @end smallexample
18946
18947 @need 1250
18948 @noindent
18949 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
18950
18951 @smallexample
18952 kill-ring
18953 @end smallexample
18954
18955 @need 800
18956 @noindent
18957 It is:
18958
18959 @smallexample
18960 @group
18961 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
18962 "third line" "second piece of text")
18963 @end group
18964 @end smallexample
18965
18966 @noindent
18967 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
18968
18969 @need 1250
18970 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
18971
18972 @smallexample
18973 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
18974 @end smallexample
18975
18976 @node current-kill
18977 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
18978 @findex current-kill
18979
18980 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
18981 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
18982 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
18983 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
18984 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
18985 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
18986 and @code{kill-region}.)
18987
18988 @menu
18989 * Code for current-kill::
18990 * Understanding current-kill::
18991 @end menu
18992
18993 @ifnottex
18994 @node Code for current-kill
18995 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
18996 @end ifnottex
18997
18998
18999 @need 1500
19000 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19001 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19002
19003 @smallexample
19004 @group
19005 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19006 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19007 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19008 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19009 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19010 @end group
19011 @group
19012 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19013 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19014 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19015 interprogram-paste-function
19016 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19017 @end group
19018 @group
19019 (if interprogram-paste
19020 (progn
19021 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19022 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19023 ;; selection, with identical text.
19024 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19025 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19026 interprogram-paste)
19027 @end group
19028 @group
19029 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19030 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19031 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19032 (length kill-ring))
19033 kill-ring)))
19034 (or do-not-move
19035 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19036 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19037 @end group
19038 @end smallexample
19039
19040 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19041 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19042 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19043 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19044 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19045
19046 @need 1500
19047 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19048 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19049
19050 @smallexample
19051 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19052 @end smallexample
19053
19054 @ifnottex
19055 @node Understanding current-kill
19056 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19057 @end ifnottex
19058
19059 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19060 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19061 skeletal form:
19062
19063 @smallexample
19064 @group
19065 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19066 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19067 (let @var{varlist}
19068 @var{body}@dots{})
19069 @end group
19070 @end smallexample
19071
19072 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19073 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19074
19075 @menu
19076 * Body of current-kill::
19077 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19078 * Determining the Element::
19079 @end menu
19080
19081 @ifnottex
19082 @node Body of current-kill
19083 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19084 @end ifnottex
19085
19086 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19087 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19088
19089 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19090 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19091 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19092 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19093 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19094 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19095 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19096 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19097
19098 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19099 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19100
19101 @need 2000
19102 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19103 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19104 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19105 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19106
19107 @smallexample
19108 @group
19109 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19110 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19111 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19112 (length kill-ring))
19113 kill-ring)))
19114 (or do-not-move
19115 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19116 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19117 @end group
19118 @end smallexample
19119
19120 @noindent
19121 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19122 signals an error.
19123
19124 @need 1000
19125 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19126 with an @code{if}:
19127
19128 @findex zerop
19129 @findex error
19130 @smallexample
19131 @group
19132 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19133 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19134 ;; No else-part
19135 @end group
19136 @end smallexample
19137
19138 @noindent
19139 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19140 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19141 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19142 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19143
19144 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19145 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19146 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19147 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19148 is similar to the @code{message} function
19149 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19150 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19151 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19152 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19153 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19154
19155 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19156 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19157 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19158
19159 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19160 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19161 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19162 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19163
19164 @ifnottex
19165 @node Digression concerning error
19166 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19167 @end ifnottex
19168
19169 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19170 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19171 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19172 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19173 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19174 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19175 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19176 exploration.
19177
19178 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19179 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19180 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19181 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19182 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19183 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19184 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19185
19186 @ifnottex
19187 @node Determining the Element
19188 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19189 @end ifnottex
19190
19191 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19192 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19193 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19194 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19195
19196 @need 800
19197 The code looks like this:
19198
19199 @smallexample
19200 @group
19201 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19202 (length kill-ring))
19203 kill-ring)))
19204 @end group
19205 @end smallexample
19206
19207 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19208 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19209 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19210 That is what the
19211 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19212 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19213 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19214 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19215 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19216
19217 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19218 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19219 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19220
19221 @need 800
19222 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19223
19224 @smallexample
19225 @group
19226 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19227
19228 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19229 @end group
19230 @end smallexample
19231
19232 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19233 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19234
19235 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19236 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19237
19238 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19239 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19240 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19241 sign as the second argument.
19242
19243 @need 800
19244 Thus,
19245
19246 @smallexample
19247 @group
19248 (mod 12 4)
19249 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19250 (mod 13 4)
19251 @result{} 1
19252 @end group
19253 @end smallexample
19254
19255 @need 1250
19256 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19257 That is fine.
19258
19259 @smallexample
19260 @group
19261 (mod 0 4)
19262 @result{} 0
19263 (mod 1 4)
19264 @result{} 1
19265 @end group
19266 @end smallexample
19267
19268 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19269 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19270 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19271 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19272
19273 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19274 @code{current-kill} function.
19275
19276 @need 1250
19277 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19278 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19279 following:
19280
19281 @smallexample
19282 @group
19283 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19284 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19285 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19286 '("fourth line of text"
19287 "third line"
19288 "second piece of text"
19289 "first some text"))
19290 @end group
19291 @end smallexample
19292
19293 @need 1250
19294 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19295 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19296 element.
19297
19298 @smallexample
19299 @group
19300 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19301 '("fourth line of text"
19302 "third line"
19303 "second piece of text"
19304 "first some text"))
19305 @end group
19306 @end smallexample
19307
19308 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19309 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19310 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19311 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19312 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19313 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19314 Local variables can only be accessed
19315 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19316 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19317
19318 @ignore
19319 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19320 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19321 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
19322 @end ignore
19323
19324 @node yank
19325 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19326 @findex yank
19327
19328 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19329 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19330
19331 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19332 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19333 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19334 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19335
19336 @need 1250
19337 The code looks like this:
19338
19339 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19340 @smallexample
19341 @group
19342 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19343 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19344 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19345 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19346 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19347 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19348 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19349
19350 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19351 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19352 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19353
19354 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19355 @end group
19356 @group
19357 (interactive "*P")
19358 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19359 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19360 ;; for the following command.
19361 (setq this-command t)
19362 (push-mark (point))
19363 @end group
19364 @group
19365 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19366 ((listp arg) 0)
19367 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19368 (t (1- arg)))))
19369 (if (consp arg)
19370 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19371 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19372 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19373 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19374 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19375 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19376 @end group
19377 @group
19378 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19379 (if (eq this-command t)
19380 (setq this-command 'yank))
19381 nil)
19382 @end group
19383 @end smallexample
19384
19385 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19386 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19387 it.
19388
19389 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19390 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19391 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19392 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19393 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19394
19395 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19396 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19397 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19398
19399 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19400 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19401 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19402 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19403 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19404 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19405 function.)
19406
19407 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19408
19409 @node yank-pop
19410 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19411 @findex yank-pop
19412
19413 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19414 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19415 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19416
19417 @c GNU Emacs 22
19418 @smallexample
19419 @group
19420 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19421 "@dots{}"
19422 (interactive "*p")
19423 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19424 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19425 @end group
19426 @group
19427 (setq this-command 'yank)
19428 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19429 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19430 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19431 @end group
19432 @group
19433 (if before
19434 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19435 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19436 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19437 @end group
19438 @group
19439 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19440 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19441 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19442 ;; if possible.
19443 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19444 @end group
19445 @group
19446 (if before
19447 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19448 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19449 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19450 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19451 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19452 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19453 (point)
19454 (current-buffer))))))
19455 nil)
19456 @end group
19457 @end smallexample
19458
19459 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19460 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19461 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19462 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19463 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19464 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19465
19466 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19467 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19468 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19469 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19470 replaced.
19471
19472 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19473 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19474 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19475 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19476
19477 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19478
19479 @node ring file
19480 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19481 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19482
19483 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19484 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19485 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19486 because they were written earlier.
19487
19488 @node Full Graph
19489 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19490
19491 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19492 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19493 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19494 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19495 body itself.
19496
19497 @menu
19498 * Labeled Example::
19499 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19500 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19501 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19502 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19503 @end menu
19504
19505 @ifnottex
19506 @node Labeled Example
19507 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19508 @end ifnottex
19509
19510 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19511 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19512 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19513 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19514
19515 @enumerate
19516 @item
19517 Set up code.
19518
19519 @item
19520 Print Y axis.
19521
19522 @item
19523 Print body of graph.
19524
19525 @item
19526 Print X axis.
19527 @end enumerate
19528
19529 @need 800
19530 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19531
19532 @smallexample
19533 @group
19534 10 -
19535 *
19536 * *
19537 * **
19538 * ***
19539 5 - * *******
19540 * *** *******
19541 *************
19542 ***************
19543 1 - ****************
19544 | | | |
19545 1 5 10 15
19546 @end group
19547 @end smallexample
19548
19549 @noindent
19550 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19551 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19552 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19553
19554 @smallexample
19555 @group
19556 5 - *
19557 * ** *
19558 *******
19559 ********** **
19560 1 - **************
19561 | ^ |
19562 Jan June Jan
19563 @end group
19564 @end smallexample
19565
19566 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19567 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19568 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19569 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19570 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19571
19572 @need 1200
19573 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19574 @code{print-graph} function:
19575
19576 @smallexample
19577 @group
19578 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19579 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19580 (let ((height @dots{}
19581 @dots{}))
19582 @end group
19583 @group
19584 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19585 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19586 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19587 @end group
19588 @end smallexample
19589
19590 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19591 in turn.
19592
19593 @node print-graph Varlist
19594 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19595 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19596
19597 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19598 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19599 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19600 contents of its documentation string.)
19601
19602 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19603 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19604 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19605 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19606 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19607 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19608 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19609
19610 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19611 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19612 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19613 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19614 previous chapter.
19615
19616 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19617 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19618 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19619
19620 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19621 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19622
19623 @smallexample
19624 @group
19625 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19626 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19627 @end group
19628 @end smallexample
19629
19630 @noindent
19631 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19632
19633 @need 2000
19634 @node print-Y-axis
19635 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19636 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19637 @cindex Y axis printing
19638 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19639 @cindex Print vertical axis
19640
19641 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19642 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19643
19644 @smallexample
19645 @group
19646 10 -
19647
19648
19649
19650
19651 5 -
19652
19653
19654
19655 1 -
19656 @end group
19657 @end smallexample
19658
19659 @noindent
19660 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19661 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19662
19663 @menu
19664 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19665 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19666 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19667 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19668 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19669 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19670 @end menu
19671
19672 @ifnottex
19673 @node print-Y-axis in Detail
19674 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19675 @end ifnottex
19676
19677 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19678 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19679 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19680 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19681 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19682 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19683 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19684 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19685 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19686 five.
19687
19688 @ifnottex
19689 @node Height of label
19690 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19691 @end ifnottex
19692
19693 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19694 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19695 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19696 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19697 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19698 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19699
19700 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19701 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19702 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19703 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19704 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19705 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19706 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19707 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19708 is required.
19709
19710 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19711 divided into several smaller problems.
19712
19713 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19714 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19715 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19716
19717 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19718 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19719 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19720 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19721 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19722 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19723 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19724 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19725
19726 @node Compute a Remainder
19727 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19728
19729 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
19730 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
19731 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
19732 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
19733 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
19734 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
19735 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
19736 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
19737 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
19738
19739 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
19740 expressions:
19741
19742 @smallexample
19743 @group
19744 (% 7 5)
19745
19746 (% 10 5)
19747 @end group
19748 @end smallexample
19749
19750 @noindent
19751 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
19752
19753 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
19754 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
19755 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
19756
19757 @smallexample
19758 @group
19759 (zerop (% 7 5))
19760 @result{} nil
19761
19762 (zerop (% 10 5))
19763 @result{} t
19764 @end group
19765 @end smallexample
19766
19767 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
19768 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
19769
19770 @smallexample
19771 (zerop (% height 5))
19772 @end smallexample
19773
19774 @noindent
19775 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
19776 'max numbers-list)}.)
19777
19778 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
19779 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
19780 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
19781 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
19782 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
19783 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
19784 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
19785 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
19786 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
19787 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
19788
19789 @smallexample
19790 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
19791 @end smallexample
19792
19793 @noindent
19794 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
19795
19796 @smallexample
19797 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
19798 @end smallexample
19799
19800 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
19801 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
19802 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
19803 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
19804 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19805
19806 @need 1250
19807 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
19808 following:
19809
19810 @smallexample
19811 @group
19812 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19813 height
19814 ;; @r{else}
19815 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19816 Y-axis-label-spacing))
19817 @end group
19818 @end smallexample
19819
19820 @noindent
19821 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
19822 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
19823 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
19824 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19825
19826 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
19827 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
19828 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
19829 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
19830
19831 @smallexample
19832 @group
19833 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
19834 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
19835 @end group
19836
19837 @group
19838 @dots{}
19839 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
19840 (height-of-top-line
19841 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19842 height
19843 @end group
19844 @group
19845 ;; @r{else}
19846 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19847 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
19848 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
19849 @dots{}
19850 @end group
19851 @end smallexample
19852
19853 @noindent
19854 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
19855 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
19856 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
19857 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
19858 more about @code{let*}.)
19859
19860 @node Y Axis Element
19861 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
19862
19863 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
19864 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
19865 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
19866 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
19867 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
19868 include a leading blank space before the number.
19869
19870 @findex number-to-string
19871 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
19872 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
19873 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
19874 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
19875 For example,
19876
19877 @smallexample
19878 @group
19879 (length (number-to-string 35))
19880 @result{} 2
19881
19882 (length (number-to-string 100))
19883 @result{} 3
19884 @end group
19885 @end smallexample
19886
19887 @noindent
19888 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
19889 see this alternative name in various sources.)
19890
19891 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
19892 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
19893 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
19894
19895 @vindex Y-axis-tic
19896 @smallexample
19897 @group
19898 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
19899 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
19900 @end group
19901 @end smallexample
19902
19903 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
19904 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
19905
19906 @smallexample
19907 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
19908 @end smallexample
19909
19910 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
19911 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
19912 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
19913
19914 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
19915 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
19916 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
19917 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
19918 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
19919 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
19920 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
19921
19922 @smallexample
19923 @group
19924 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
19925 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
19926 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
19927 and is padded as needed so all line up with
19928 the element for the largest number."
19929 @end group
19930 @group
19931 (let* ((leading-spaces
19932 (- full-Y-label-width
19933 (length
19934 (concat (number-to-string number)
19935 Y-axis-tic)))))
19936 @end group
19937 @group
19938 (concat
19939 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
19940 (number-to-string number)
19941 Y-axis-tic)))
19942 @end group
19943 @end smallexample
19944
19945 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
19946 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
19947
19948 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
19949 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
19950 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
19951
19952 @findex make-string
19953 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
19954 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
19955 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
19956 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
19957 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
19958 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
19959 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
19960 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
19961
19962 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
19963 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
19964 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
19965
19966 @node Y-axis-column
19967 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
19968
19969 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
19970 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
19971 as the label for the vertical axis:
19972
19973 @findex Y-axis-column
19974 @smallexample
19975 @group
19976 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
19977 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
19978 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
19979 (let (Y-axis)
19980 @group
19981 @end group
19982 (while (> height 1)
19983 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19984 ;; @r{Insert label.}
19985 (setq Y-axis
19986 (cons
19987 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
19988 Y-axis))
19989 @group
19990 @end group
19991 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
19992 (setq Y-axis
19993 (cons
19994 (make-string width-of-label ? )
19995 Y-axis)))
19996 (setq height (1- height)))
19997 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
19998 (setq Y-axis
19999 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20000 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20001 @end group
20002 @end smallexample
20003
20004 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20005 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20006 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20007 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20008 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20009 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20010 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20011
20012 @need 2000
20013 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate
20014 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20015
20016 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20017 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20018
20019 @findex print-Y-axis
20020 @smallexample
20021 @group
20022 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20023 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20024 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20025 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20026 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20027 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20028 @end group
20029 @group
20030 (let ((start (point)))
20031 (insert-rectangle
20032 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20033 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20034 (goto-char start)
20035 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20036 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20037 @end group
20038 @end smallexample
20039
20040 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20041 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20042 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20043 the graph.
20044
20045 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20046
20047 @enumerate
20048 @item
20049 Install
20050
20051 @smallexample
20052 @group
20053 Y-axis-label-spacing
20054 Y-axis-tic
20055 Y-axis-element
20056 Y-axis-column
20057 print-Y-axis
20058 @end group
20059 @end smallexample
20060
20061 @item
20062 Copy the following expression:
20063
20064 @smallexample
20065 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20066 @end smallexample
20067
20068 @item
20069 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20070 want the axis labels to start.
20071
20072 @item
20073 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20074
20075 @item
20076 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20077 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20078
20079 @item
20080 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20081 @end enumerate
20082
20083 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20084 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20085 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20086 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20087
20088 @need 2000
20089 @node print-X-axis
20090 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20091 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20092 @cindex X axis printing
20093 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20094 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20095
20096 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20097 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20098
20099 @smallexample
20100 @group
20101 | | | |
20102 1 5 10 15
20103 @end group
20104 @end smallexample
20105
20106 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20107 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20108 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20109 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20110
20111 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20112 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20113 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20114
20115 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20116 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20117 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20118 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20119
20120 @menu
20121 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20122 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20123 @end menu
20124
20125 @ifnottex
20126 @node Similarities differences
20127 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20128 @end ifnottex
20129
20130 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20131 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20132 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20133 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20134 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20135
20136 This is a three step process:
20137
20138 @enumerate
20139 @item
20140 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20141
20142 @item
20143 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20144
20145 @item
20146 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20147 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20148 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20149 @end enumerate
20150
20151 @node X Axis Tic Marks
20152 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20153
20154 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20155 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20156
20157 @smallexample
20158 @group
20159 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20160 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20161 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20162 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20163 @end group
20164 @end smallexample
20165
20166 @noindent
20167 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20168 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20169 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20170 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20171 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20172 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20173 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20174
20175 @need 1200
20176 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20177
20178 @smallexample
20179 @group
20180 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20181 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20182 @end group
20183 @end smallexample
20184
20185 @need 1250
20186 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20187
20188 @smallexample
20189 | | | |
20190 @end smallexample
20191
20192 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20193 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20194
20195 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20196 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20197 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20198
20199 @need 1250
20200 The code looks like this:
20201
20202 @smallexample
20203 @group
20204 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20205 @dots{}
20206 (concat
20207 (make-string
20208 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20209 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20210 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20211 ? )
20212 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20213 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20214 @dots{}
20215 @end group
20216 @end smallexample
20217
20218 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20219 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20220 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20221
20222 @need 1250
20223 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20224 looks like this:
20225
20226 @smallexample
20227 @group
20228 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20229 @dots{}
20230 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20231 @dots{}
20232 @end group
20233 @end smallexample
20234
20235 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20236 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20237 axis:
20238
20239 @smallexample
20240 @group
20241 ;; X-length
20242 @dots{}
20243 (length numbers-list)
20244 @end group
20245
20246 @group
20247 ;; tic-width
20248 @dots{}
20249 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20250 @end group
20251
20252 @group
20253 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20254 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20255 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20256 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20257 @end group
20258 @end smallexample
20259
20260 @need 1250
20261 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20262
20263 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20264 @smallexample
20265 @group
20266 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20267 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20268 "Print ticks for X axis."
20269 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20270 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20271 @end group
20272 @group
20273 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20274 (insert (concat
20275 (make-string
20276 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20277 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20278 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20279 ? )
20280 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20281 @end group
20282 @group
20283 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20284 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20285 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20286 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20287 @end group
20288 @end smallexample
20289
20290 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20291
20292 @need 1250
20293 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20294
20295 @findex X-axis-element
20296 @smallexample
20297 @group
20298 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20299 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20300 (let ((leading-spaces
20301 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20302 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20303 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20304 (number-to-string number))))
20305 @end group
20306 @end smallexample
20307
20308 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20309 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20310
20311 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20312 @smallexample
20313 @group
20314 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20315 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20316 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20317 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20318 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20319 (insert "1")
20320 @end group
20321 @group
20322 (insert (concat
20323 (make-string
20324 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20325 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20326 ? )
20327 (number-to-string number)))
20328 @end group
20329 @group
20330 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20331 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20332 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20333 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20334 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20335 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20336 @end group
20337 @end smallexample
20338
20339 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20340 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20341 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20342
20343 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20344 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20345 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20346 separates the two lines.
20347
20348 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20349 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20350
20351 @findex print-X-axis
20352 @smallexample
20353 @group
20354 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20355 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20356 (let* ((leading-spaces
20357 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20358 @end group
20359 @group
20360 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20361 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20362 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20363 @end group
20364 @group
20365 (X-tic
20366 (concat
20367 (make-string
20368 @end group
20369 @group
20370 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20371 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20372 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20373 ? )
20374 @end group
20375 @group
20376 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20377 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20378 @end group
20379 @group
20380 (tic-number
20381 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20382 (/ X-length tic-width)
20383 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20384 @end group
20385 @group
20386 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20387 (insert "\n")
20388 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20389 @end group
20390 @end smallexample
20391
20392 @need 1250
20393 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20394
20395 @enumerate
20396 @item
20397 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20398 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20399 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20400
20401 @item
20402 Copy the following expression:
20403
20404 @smallexample
20405 @group
20406 (progn
20407 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20408 (symbol-width 1))
20409 (print-X-axis
20410 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20411 @end group
20412 @end smallexample
20413
20414 @item
20415 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20416 want the axis labels to start.
20417
20418 @item
20419 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20420
20421 @item
20422 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20423 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20424
20425 @item
20426 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20427 @end enumerate
20428
20429 @need 1250
20430 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20431 @sp 1
20432
20433 @smallexample
20434 @group
20435 | | | | |
20436 1 5 10 15 20
20437 @end group
20438 @end smallexample
20439
20440 @node Print Whole Graph
20441 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20442 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20443 @cindex Whole graph printing
20444 @cindex Graph, printing all
20445
20446 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20447
20448 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20449 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20450 Axes}), but with additions.
20451
20452 @need 1250
20453 Here is the outline:
20454
20455 @smallexample
20456 @group
20457 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20458 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20459 (let ((height @dots{}
20460 @dots{}))
20461 @end group
20462 @group
20463 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20464 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20465 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20466 @end group
20467 @end smallexample
20468
20469 @menu
20470 * The final version:: A few changes.
20471 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20472 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20473 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20474 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20475 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20476 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20477 @end menu
20478
20479 @ifnottex
20480 @node The final version
20481 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20482 @end ifnottex
20483
20484 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20485 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20486 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20487 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20488 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20489
20490 @need 1500
20491 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20492 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20493 this:
20494
20495 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20496 @smallexample
20497 @group
20498 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20499 (defun Y-axis-column
20500 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20501 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20502 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20503 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20504 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20505 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20506 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20507 that each line is five units of the graph."
20508 @end group
20509 @group
20510 (let (Y-axis
20511 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20512 (while (> height 1)
20513 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20514 @end group
20515 @group
20516 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20517 (setq Y-axis
20518 (cons
20519 (Y-axis-element
20520 (* height number-per-line)
20521 width-of-label)
20522 Y-axis))
20523 @end group
20524 @group
20525 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20526 (setq Y-axis
20527 (cons
20528 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20529 Y-axis)))
20530 (setq height (1- height)))
20531 @end group
20532 @group
20533 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20534 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20535 (or vertical-step 1)
20536 width-of-label)
20537 Y-axis))
20538 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20539 @end group
20540 @end smallexample
20541
20542 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20543 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20544 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20545
20546 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20547 @smallexample
20548 @group
20549 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20550 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20551 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20552 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20553 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20554 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20555 @end group
20556 @group
20557 (let (from-position)
20558 (while numbers-list
20559 (setq from-position (point))
20560 (insert-rectangle
20561 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20562 (goto-char from-position)
20563 (forward-char symbol-width)
20564 @end group
20565 @group
20566 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20567 (sit-for 0)
20568 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20569 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20570 (forward-line height)
20571 (insert "\n")))
20572 @end group
20573 @end smallexample
20574
20575 @need 1250
20576 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20577
20578 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20579 @smallexample
20580 @group
20581 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20582 (defun print-graph
20583 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20584 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20585 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20586 @end group
20587
20588 @group
20589 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20590 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20591 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20592 each row is five units."
20593 @end group
20594 @group
20595 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20596 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20597 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20598 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20599 @end group
20600 @group
20601 (height-of-top-line
20602 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20603 height
20604 ;; @r{else}
20605 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20606 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20607 @end group
20608 @group
20609 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20610 (full-Y-label-width
20611 (length
20612 @end group
20613 @group
20614 (concat
20615 (number-to-string
20616 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20617 Y-axis-tic))))
20618 @end group
20619
20620 @group
20621 (print-Y-axis
20622 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20623 @end group
20624 @group
20625 (graph-body-print
20626 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20627 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20628 @end group
20629 @end smallexample
20630
20631 @node Test print-graph
20632 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20633
20634 @need 1250
20635 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20636
20637 @enumerate
20638 @item
20639 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20640 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20641 rest of the code.)
20642
20643 @item
20644 Copy the following expression:
20645
20646 @smallexample
20647 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20648 @end smallexample
20649
20650 @item
20651 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20652 want the axis labels to start.
20653
20654 @item
20655 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20656
20657 @item
20658 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20659 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20660
20661 @item
20662 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20663 @end enumerate
20664
20665 @need 1250
20666 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20667
20668 @smallexample
20669 @group
20670 10 -
20671
20672
20673 *
20674 ** *
20675 5 - **** *
20676 **** ***
20677 * *********
20678 ************
20679 1 - *************
20680
20681 | | | |
20682 1 5 10 15
20683 @end group
20684 @end smallexample
20685
20686 @need 1200
20687 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20688 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20689
20690 @smallexample
20691 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20692 @end smallexample
20693
20694 @need 1250
20695 @noindent
20696 The graph looks like this:
20697
20698 @smallexample
20699 @group
20700 20 -
20701
20702
20703 *
20704 ** *
20705 10 - **** *
20706 **** ***
20707 * *********
20708 ************
20709 2 - *************
20710
20711 | | | |
20712 1 5 10 15
20713 @end group
20714 @end smallexample
20715
20716 @noindent
20717 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20718 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
20719 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
20720
20721 @node Graphing words in defuns
20722 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20723
20724 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20725 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20726 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20727 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20728
20729 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
20730 requisite code.
20731
20732 @need 1500
20733 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
20734 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
20735 following:
20736
20737 @smallexample
20738 @group
20739 (setq top-of-ranges
20740 '(10 20 30 40 50
20741 60 70 80 90 100
20742 110 120 130 140 150
20743 160 170 180 190 200
20744 210 220 230 240 250
20745 260 270 280 290 300)
20746 @end group
20747 @end smallexample
20748
20749 @noindent
20750 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
20751
20752 @need 1500
20753 @noindent
20754 Evaluate the following:
20755
20756 @smallexample
20757 @group
20758 (setq list-for-graph
20759 (defuns-per-range
20760 (sort
20761 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
20762 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
20763 t ".+el$"))
20764 '<)
20765 top-of-ranges))
20766 @end group
20767 @end smallexample
20768
20769 @noindent
20770 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
20771 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
20772 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
20773
20774 @smallexample
20775 @group
20776 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
20777 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
20778 @end group
20779 @end smallexample
20780
20781 @noindent
20782 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
20783 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
20784 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
20785 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
20786
20787 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
20788 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
20789
20790 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
20791 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
20792 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
20793 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
20794
20795 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
20796 one-fiftieth its present value.
20797
20798 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
20799 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
20800
20801 @smallexample
20802 @group
20803 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
20804 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
20805 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
20806 @end group
20807 @end smallexample
20808
20809 @node lambda
20810 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
20811 @cindex Anonymous function
20812 @findex lambda
20813
20814 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
20815 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
20816 include its whole body.
20817
20818 @need 1250
20819 @noindent
20820 Thus,
20821
20822 @smallexample
20823 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20824 @end smallexample
20825
20826 @noindent
20827 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
20828 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
20829
20830 @need 1200
20831 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
20832 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
20833 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
20834 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
20835
20836 @smallexample
20837 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
20838 @end smallexample
20839
20840 @noindent
20841 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
20842
20843 @need 1250
20844 @noindent
20845 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
20846
20847 @c clear print-postscript-figures
20848 @c lambda example diagram #1
20849 @ifnottex
20850 @smallexample
20851 @group
20852 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20853 \_______________/ ^
20854 | |
20855 function argument
20856 @end group
20857 @end smallexample
20858 @end ifnottex
20859 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20860 @sp 1
20861 @tex
20862 @center @image{lambda-1}
20863 @end tex
20864 @sp 1
20865 @end ifset
20866 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20867 @iftex
20868 @smallexample
20869 @group
20870 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20871 \_______________/ ^
20872 | |
20873 function argument
20874 @end group
20875 @end smallexample
20876 @end iftex
20877 @end ifclear
20878
20879 @noindent
20880 This expression returns 21.
20881
20882 @need 1250
20883 @noindent
20884 Similarly, we can write:
20885
20886 @c lambda example diagram #2
20887 @ifnottex
20888 @smallexample
20889 @group
20890 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20891 \____________________________/ ^
20892 | |
20893 anonymous function argument
20894 @end group
20895 @end smallexample
20896 @end ifnottex
20897 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20898 @sp 1
20899 @tex
20900 @center @image{lambda-2}
20901 @end tex
20902 @sp 1
20903 @end ifset
20904 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20905 @iftex
20906 @smallexample
20907 @group
20908 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20909 \____________________________/ ^
20910 | |
20911 anonymous function argument
20912 @end group
20913 @end smallexample
20914 @end iftex
20915 @end ifclear
20916
20917 @need 1250
20918 @noindent
20919 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
20920
20921 @c lambda example diagram #3
20922 @ifnottex
20923 @smallexample
20924 @group
20925 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20926 \______________________/ \_/
20927 | |
20928 anonymous function argument
20929 @end group
20930 @end smallexample
20931 @end ifnottex
20932 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20933 @sp 1
20934 @tex
20935 @center @image{lambda-3}
20936 @end tex
20937 @sp 1
20938 @end ifset
20939 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20940 @iftex
20941 @smallexample
20942 @group
20943 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20944 \______________________/ \_/
20945 | |
20946 anonymous function argument
20947 @end group
20948 @end smallexample
20949 @end iftex
20950 @end ifclear
20951
20952 @noindent
20953 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
20954 divides that number by 50.
20955
20956 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
20957 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
20958 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
20959
20960 @node mapcar
20961 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
20962 @findex mapcar
20963
20964 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
20965 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
20966 a sequence.
20967
20968 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
20969 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
20970 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
20971 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
20972 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
20973 first of a list.
20974
20975 @need 1250
20976 @noindent
20977 For example,
20978
20979 @smallexample
20980 @group
20981 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
20982 @result{} (3 5 7)
20983 @end group
20984 @end smallexample
20985
20986 @noindent
20987 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
20988 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
20989
20990 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
20991 all the remaining.
20992 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
20993 @code{apply}.)
20994
20995 @need 1250
20996 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
20997 anonymous function:
20998
20999 @smallexample
21000 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21001 @end smallexample
21002
21003 @noindent
21004 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21005 @code{list-for-graph}.
21006
21007 @need 1250
21008 The whole expression looks like this:
21009
21010 @smallexample
21011 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21012 @end smallexample
21013
21014 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21015 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21016
21017 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21018 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21019 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21020
21021 @smallexample
21022 @group
21023 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21024 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21025 @end group
21026 @end smallexample
21027
21028 @need 1250
21029 The resulting list looks like this:
21030
21031 @smallexample
21032 @group
21033 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21034 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21035 @end group
21036 @end smallexample
21037
21038 @noindent
21039 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21040 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21041 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21042 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21043
21044 @node Another Bug
21045 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21046 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21047 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21048
21049 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21050 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21051 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21052 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21053 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21054
21055 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21056 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21057 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21058 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21059 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21060 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21061 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21062 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21063
21064 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21065 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21066 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21067 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21068 a little thought.
21069
21070 @need 1250
21071 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21072
21073 @smallexample
21074 @group
21075 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21076 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21077 &optional horizontal-step)
21078 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21079 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21080 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21081 @end group
21082 @group
21083 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21084 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21085 (delete-char
21086 (- (1-
21087 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21088 (insert (concat
21089 (make-string
21090 @end group
21091 @group
21092 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21093 (- (* symbol-width
21094 X-axis-label-spacing)
21095 (1-
21096 (length
21097 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21098 2)
21099 ? )
21100 (number-to-string
21101 (* number horizontal-step))))
21102 @end group
21103 @group
21104 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21105 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21106 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21107 (insert (X-axis-element
21108 (* number horizontal-step)))
21109 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21110 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21111 @end group
21112 @end smallexample
21113
21114 @need 1500
21115 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21116 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21117 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21118 (the full text is too much to print).
21119
21120 @iftex
21121 @smallexample
21122 @group
21123 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21124 @dots{}
21125 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21126 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21127 @end group
21128 @end smallexample
21129
21130 @smallexample
21131 @group
21132 (defun print-graph
21133 (numbers-list
21134 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21135 @dots{}
21136 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21137 @end group
21138 @end smallexample
21139 @end iftex
21140
21141 @ifnottex
21142 @smallexample
21143 @group
21144 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21145 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21146 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21147 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21148 each column."
21149 @end group
21150 @group
21151 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21152 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21153 (let* ((leading-spaces
21154 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21155 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21156 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21157 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21158 @end group
21159 @group
21160 (X-tic
21161 (concat
21162 (make-string
21163 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21164 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21165 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21166 ? )
21167 @end group
21168 @group
21169 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21170 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21171 (tic-number
21172 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21173 (/ X-length tic-width)
21174 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21175 @end group
21176
21177 @group
21178 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21179 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21180 (insert "\n")
21181 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21182 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21183 @end group
21184 @end smallexample
21185
21186 @smallexample
21187 @group
21188 (defun print-graph
21189 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21190 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21191 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21192 @end group
21193
21194 @group
21195 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21196 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21197 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21198 each row is five units.
21199 @end group
21200
21201 @group
21202 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21203 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21204 each column."
21205 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21206 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21207 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21208 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21209 @end group
21210 @group
21211 (height-of-top-line
21212 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21213 height
21214 ;; @r{else}
21215 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21216 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21217 @end group
21218 @group
21219 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21220 (full-Y-label-width
21221 (length
21222 (concat
21223 (number-to-string
21224 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21225 Y-axis-tic))))
21226 @end group
21227 @group
21228 (print-Y-axis
21229 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21230 (graph-body-print
21231 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21232 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21233 @end group
21234 @end smallexample
21235 @end ifnottex
21236
21237 @c qqq
21238 @ignore
21239 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21240
21241 @need 1250
21242 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21243
21244 @smallexample
21245 @group
21246 (defvar top-of-ranges
21247 '(10 20 30 40 50
21248 60 70 80 90 100
21249 110 120 130 140 150
21250 160 170 180 190 200
21251 210 220 230 240 250)
21252 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21253 @end group
21254
21255 @group
21256 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21257 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21258 @end group
21259
21260 @group
21261 (defvar graph-blank " "
21262 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21263 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21264 as graph-symbol.")
21265 @end group
21266
21267 @group
21268 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21269 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21270 @end group
21271
21272 @group
21273 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21274 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21275 @end group
21276
21277 @group
21278 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21279 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21280 @end group
21281
21282 @group
21283 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21284 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21285 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21286 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21287 @end group
21288 @end smallexample
21289
21290 @smallexample
21291 @group
21292 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21293 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21294 (beginning-of-defun)
21295 (let ((count 0)
21296 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21297 @end group
21298
21299 @group
21300 (while
21301 (and (< (point) end)
21302 (re-search-forward
21303 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21304 end t))
21305 (setq count (1+ count)))
21306 count))
21307 @end group
21308 @end smallexample
21309
21310 @smallexample
21311 @group
21312 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21313 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21314 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21315 Each number is the number of words or
21316 symbols in one function definition."
21317 @end group
21318
21319 @group
21320 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21321 (save-excursion
21322 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21323 (lengths-list))
21324 (set-buffer buffer)
21325 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21326 (widen)
21327 (goto-char (point-min))
21328 @end group
21329
21330 @group
21331 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21332 (setq lengths-list
21333 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21334 (kill-buffer buffer)
21335 lengths-list)))
21336 @end group
21337 @end smallexample
21338
21339 @smallexample
21340 @group
21341 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21342 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21343 (let (lengths-list)
21344 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21345 (while list-of-files
21346 (setq lengths-list
21347 (append
21348 lengths-list
21349 @end group
21350 @group
21351 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21352 (lengths-list-file
21353 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21354 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21355 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21356 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21357 lengths-list))
21358 @end group
21359 @end smallexample
21360
21361 @smallexample
21362 @group
21363 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21364 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21365 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21366 (number-within-range 0)
21367 defuns-per-range-list)
21368 @end group
21369
21370 @group
21371 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21372 (while top-of-ranges
21373
21374 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21375 (while (and
21376 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21377 (car sorted-lengths)
21378 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21379
21380 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21381 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21382 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21383 @end group
21384
21385 @group
21386 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21387
21388 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21389 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21390 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21391
21392 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21393 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21394 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21395 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21396 @end group
21397
21398 @group
21399 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21400 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21401 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21402 (cons
21403 (length sorted-lengths)
21404 defuns-per-range-list))
21405
21406 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21407 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21408 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21409 @end group
21410 @end smallexample
21411
21412 @smallexample
21413 @group
21414 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21415 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21416 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21417 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21418 of the list.
21419 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21420 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21421 @end group
21422
21423 @group
21424 (let ((insert-list nil)
21425 (number-of-top-blanks
21426 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21427
21428 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21429 (while (> actual-height 0)
21430 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21431 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21432 @end group
21433
21434 @group
21435 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21436 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21437 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21438 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21439 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21440
21441 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21442 insert-list))
21443 @end group
21444 @end smallexample
21445
21446 @smallexample
21447 @group
21448 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21449 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21450 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21451 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21452 the element for the largest number."
21453 @end group
21454 @group
21455 (let* ((leading-spaces
21456 (- full-Y-label-width
21457 (length
21458 (concat (number-to-string number)
21459 Y-axis-tic)))))
21460 @end group
21461 @group
21462 (concat
21463 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21464 (number-to-string number)
21465 Y-axis-tic)))
21466 @end group
21467 @end smallexample
21468
21469 @smallexample
21470 @group
21471 (defun print-Y-axis
21472 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21473 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21474 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21475 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21476 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21477 @end group
21478 @group
21479 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21480 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21481 (let ((start (point)))
21482 (insert-rectangle
21483 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21484 @end group
21485 @group
21486 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21487 (goto-char start)
21488 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21489 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21490 @end group
21491 @end smallexample
21492
21493 @smallexample
21494 @group
21495 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21496 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21497 "Print ticks for X axis."
21498 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21499 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21500 @end group
21501 @group
21502 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21503 (insert (concat
21504 (make-string
21505 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21506 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21507 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21508 ? )
21509 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21510 @end group
21511 @group
21512 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21513 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21514 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21515 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21516 @end group
21517 @end smallexample
21518
21519 @smallexample
21520 @group
21521 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21522 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21523 (let ((leading-spaces
21524 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21525 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21526 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21527 (number-to-string number))))
21528 @end group
21529 @end smallexample
21530
21531 @smallexample
21532 @group
21533 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21534 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21535 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21536 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21537 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21538 @end group
21539 @group
21540 (let (from-position)
21541 (while numbers-list
21542 (setq from-position (point))
21543 (insert-rectangle
21544 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21545 (goto-char from-position)
21546 (forward-char symbol-width)
21547 @end group
21548 @group
21549 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21550 (sit-for 0)
21551 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21552 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21553 (forward-line height)
21554 (insert "\n")))
21555 @end group
21556 @end smallexample
21557
21558 @smallexample
21559 @group
21560 (defun Y-axis-column
21561 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21562 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21563 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21564 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21565 @end group
21566 @group
21567 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21568 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21569 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21570 that each line is five units of the graph."
21571 (let (Y-axis
21572 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21573 @end group
21574 @group
21575 (while (> height 1)
21576 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21577 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21578 (setq Y-axis
21579 (cons
21580 (Y-axis-element
21581 (* height number-per-line)
21582 width-of-label)
21583 Y-axis))
21584 @end group
21585 @group
21586 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21587 (setq Y-axis
21588 (cons
21589 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21590 Y-axis)))
21591 (setq height (1- height)))
21592 @end group
21593 @group
21594 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21595 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21596 (or vertical-step 1)
21597 width-of-label)
21598 Y-axis))
21599 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21600 @end group
21601 @end smallexample
21602
21603 @smallexample
21604 @group
21605 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21606 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21607 &optional horizontal-step)
21608 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21609 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21610 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21611 @end group
21612 @group
21613 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21614 ;; line up number
21615 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21616 (insert (concat
21617 (make-string
21618 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21619 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21620 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21621 2)
21622 ? )
21623 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21624 @end group
21625 @group
21626 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21627 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21628 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21629 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21630 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21631 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21632 @end group
21633 @end smallexample
21634
21635 @smallexample
21636 @group
21637 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21638 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21639 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21640 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21641 each column."
21642 @end group
21643 @group
21644 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21645 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21646 (let* ((leading-spaces
21647 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21648 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21649 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21650 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21651 @end group
21652 @group
21653 (X-tic
21654 (concat
21655 (make-string
21656 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21657 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21658 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21659 ? )
21660 @end group
21661 @group
21662 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21663 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21664 (tic-number
21665 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21666 (/ X-length tic-width)
21667 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21668 @end group
21669
21670 @group
21671 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21672 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21673 (insert "\n")
21674 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21675 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21676 @end group
21677 @end smallexample
21678
21679 @smallexample
21680 @group
21681 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21682 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21683 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21684 @end group
21685 @end smallexample
21686
21687 @smallexample
21688 @group
21689 (defun print-graph
21690 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21691 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21692 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21693 @end group
21694
21695 @group
21696 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21697 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21698 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21699 each row is five units.
21700 @end group
21701
21702 @group
21703 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21704 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21705 each column."
21706 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21707 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21708 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21709 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21710 @end group
21711 @group
21712 (height-of-top-line
21713 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21714 height
21715 ;; @r{else}
21716 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21717 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21718 @end group
21719 @group
21720 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21721 (full-Y-label-width
21722 (length
21723 (concat
21724 (number-to-string
21725 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21726 Y-axis-tic))))
21727 @end group
21728 @group
21729
21730 (print-Y-axis
21731 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21732 (graph-body-print
21733 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21734 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21735 @end group
21736 @end smallexample
21737 @c qqq
21738 @end ignore
21739
21740 @page
21741 @node Final printed graph
21742 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
21743
21744 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
21745 like this:
21746 @sp 1
21747
21748 @smallexample
21749 @group
21750 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
21751 @end group
21752 @end smallexample
21753 @sp 1
21754
21755 @noindent
21756 Here is the graph:
21757 @sp 2
21758
21759 @smallexample
21760 @group
21761 1000 - *
21762 **
21763 **
21764 **
21765 **
21766 750 - ***
21767 ***
21768 ***
21769 ***
21770 ****
21771 500 - *****
21772 ******
21773 ******
21774 ******
21775 *******
21776 250 - ********
21777 ********* *
21778 *********** *
21779 ************* *
21780 50 - ***************** * *
21781 | | | | | | | |
21782 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
21783 @end group
21784 @end smallexample
21785
21786 @sp 2
21787
21788 @noindent
21789 The largest group of functions contain 10--19 words and symbols each.
21790
21791 @node Free Software and Free Manuals
21792 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
21793
21794 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
21795 @sp 1
21796
21797 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
21798 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
21799 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
21800 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
21801 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
21802 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
21803
21804 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
21805 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
21806 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
21807 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
21808
21809 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
21810 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
21811 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
21812 them from the free software community.
21813
21814 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
21815 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
21816 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
21817 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
21818 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
21819 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
21820 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
21821 so that we cannot use it.
21822
21823 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
21824 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
21825
21826 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
21827 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
21828 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
21829 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
21830 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
21831 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
21832 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
21833 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
21834 problems.
21835
21836 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
21837 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
21838 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
21839 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
21840 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
21841
21842 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
21843 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
21844 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
21845 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
21846 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
21847 views.
21848
21849 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
21850 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
21851 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
21852 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
21853 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
21854 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
21855 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
21856 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
21857
21858 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
21859 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
21860 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
21861 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
21862 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
21863 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
21864 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
21865 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
21866
21867 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
21868 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
21869 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
21870 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
21871
21872 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
21873 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
21874 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
21875 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
21876
21877 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
21878 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
21879 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
21880 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
21881 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
21882
21883 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
21884 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
21885 change that.
21886
21887 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
21888 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
21889 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
21890 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
21891 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
21892 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
21893
21894 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
21895 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
21896 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
21897 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
21898 he must above all make it free.
21899
21900 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
21901 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
21902 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
21903 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
21904
21905 @sp 2
21906 @noindent
21907 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
21908 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
21909 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
21910
21911 @node GNU Free Documentation License
21912 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
21913
21914 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
21915 @include doclicense.texi
21916
21917 @node Index
21918 @unnumbered Index
21919
21920 @ignore
21921 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
21922 @end ignore
21923
21924 @printindex cp
21925
21926 @iftex
21927 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
21928
21929 @tex
21930 \par\vfill\supereject
21931 \ifodd\pageno
21932 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21933 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21934 %\page\hbox{}\page
21935 \else
21936 % \par\vfill\supereject
21937 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21938 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21939 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21940 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21941 \fi
21942 @end tex
21943
21944 @c page
21945 @w{ }
21946
21947 @c ================ Biographical information ================
21948
21949 @w{ }
21950 @sp 8
21951 @center About the Author
21952 @sp 1
21953 @end iftex
21954
21955 @ifnottex
21956 @node About the Author
21957 @unnumbered About the Author
21958 @end ifnottex
21959
21960 @quotation
21961 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
21962 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
21963 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
21964 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
21965 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
21966 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
21967 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
21968 airplane.
21969 @end quotation
21970
21971 @c @page
21972 @c @w{ }
21973 @c
21974 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
21975 @c @tex
21976 @c \par\vfill\supereject
21977 @c @end tex
21978
21979 @c @iftex
21980 @c @headings off
21981 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
21982 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
21983 @c @end iftex
21984
21985 @bye